Ex tibris C. K. OGDEN xi WORKS PUBLISHED, OR IN THE PRESS, WILLIAM AND MARY HOWITT. UTS' PUBLISHED BY LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, AND LONGMANS, PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON. THE RURAL LIFE OF ENGLAND. NEW EDITION, Medium 8vo., with Engravings on Wood by BEWICK and WILLIAMS, uniform with " VISITS TO REMARKABLE PLACES," price 21s. cloth. PART 1. Life of the Aristocracy. 2. Life of the Agricultural Population. 3. Picturesque and Moral Fea- tures of the Country. 4. Strong Attachment of the English to Country Life. 5. The Forests of England. "Only inferior to Nature herself. English farmers, farm servants, life in the Dales of Lincolnshire and York- shire and Lancashire, scenes of wild and lonely cottage life in the High- lands, and the country pleasures and pursuits of our mechanics, are all drawn and descanted on with singular happiness." Athenaeum, Jan. 27. "In a noble and enthusiastic and liberal spirit has this work been con- ceived. In its execution, the work is in its best sense national: every page, too, offers traces of character ; and they are all of them welcome for their individuality and genuineness. He is always fearless and earnest; often excellently graphic ; frequently nervous." London and Westminster Review. CONTENTS. PART Habits, Amusements, and Condition of the People; in which are introduced Two New Chapters, de- scriptive of the Rural Watering-Places, and Edu- cation of the Rural Popu- lation. " There is or was but one man in the kingdom capable of having ex- celled this work, and that is Professor Wilson." Metropolitan Conservative Journal, Jan. 6, 1838. " A work of great merit, extensive research, much minute inquiry, and containing a faithful, accurate, and we may add elaborate history of rural life, rural pastimes, and rural man- ners." Spectator, Jan. 7, 1838. " Thrice beautiful beautiful in its subjects, beautiful in its literary execution, and beautiful in the get- ting up." St. James's Chronicle, Jan. 2. " A valuable work, and cannot fail of becoming popular." Literary Gazette, Jan. 20. [Printed by Ma I Mason, Ivy-lane, St. Paul's]. WILLIAM HOWITT'S WORKS. VISITS TO REMARKABLE PLACES; 9Hf Halls, Battle ffiieltiS, And Scenes illustrative of Striking Passuges in English History and Poetry. NEW EDITION, Medium 8vo. with 40 Illustrations by S. WILLIAMS, price 21s. cloth. CONTENTS. CHAP. 7. Visit to Hampton Court. 8. Visit to Comi>ton-Winyates, Warwickshire, a solitary old Seat of the Marquis of Northampton. 9. A Dav-Dream at Tintagel. 10. Visit to Staffa and lona. 11. Visit to Edge-Hill. 12. Visit to the Great Jesuits' College at Stonyhurst in Lancashire. 13. Visit to the Ancient City of Winchester 14. Visit to Wotton Hall, Staf- fordshire : Alfieri and Rousseau in England ; Traditions of Rousseau at Wotton. 15. Sacrament Sunday at Kil- morac in the Highlands. CHAP. 1. Visit to Penshurst in Kent, the Ancient Seat of the Sidneys. 2. Visit to the Field of Cullo- den. 3. Visit to Stratford on- Avon, and the Haunts of Shak- speare: Charlecot Hall, Clopton Hall, etc. 4. Visits to Combe Abbey, Warwickshire, as con- nected with Elizabeth of Bohemia and the Gun- powder Plot. 5. Visit to Lindisfarne.Flodden Field, and the Scenery of Marmion. 6. Visit to Bolton Priory, and Scenes of the White Doe of Rylston. "One of the most charming volumes we have chanced upon during many years a book that is likely to be read a century hence with as keen a delight as it is sure to be read now while the interest of its publication is fresh. It was a felicitous thought in William Howitt to undertake so poetical a pilgrimage, for which he is so admirably, and we had almost said peculiarly, qualified by the character of his mind, the purity of his taste, and his deep love of old traditions and their picturesque and historical associations. We can confidently recommend the volume as one of the most delightful works of its class in the language. It is richlv embel lished with woodcuts by Mr.Williams, whose talents are evidently of a high order." Atlas, Jan. 4, 1840. " A book for all seasons." Examiner, Dec. 29, 1840. VISITS TO REMARKABLE PLACES. SECOND SERIES. CHIEFLY IN THE COUNTIES OF DURHAM AND NORTHUMBERLAND. WITH A STROLL ALONG THE BORDER. With upwards of 40 highly-finished Woodcuts. Medium 8vo,, price 21s. cloth. "William Howitt has produced a volume that will be garnered up while the language lasts in the localities to which it is dedicated." Atlas, Dec. 1, 1841. "A rich treat for all genuine lovers of literature, historical antiquities, and natural scenery. The most de- lightful book which the present fer- tile season has yet produced." United Service Gazette, Jan.l, 1842. WILLIAM HOWITT S WORKS. IV. THE RURAL AND SOCIAL LIFE OF GERMANY. ILLUSTRATED BY G. F. SARGENT. Medium 8vo., uniform with the " RUBAL LIFE OF ENGLAND," price 21s. cloth. "We think this work the most and humanity every inch an Eng- interesting of any thing William Howitt has done. It possesses all his lishman gives us here a most original work on Germany. He treats us and well-known excellences, and derives our affairs with such an earnestness from its subject the attraction of both novelty and knowledge." Spectator. of conviction, such a love of impar- tiality, such an amiable candours that " This author, who has become we cannot censure him ; but must so celebrated and appreciated from many of his works, has given us, in respect what he says. The descrip- tions of scenery and of life are extra- the above volume, an extremely in- teresting and characteristic descrip- ordinarily true . He presents through- out contrasts between the two coun- tion of Life in Germany, as well as tries, so that a German may learn an accurate account of the Manners and Customs of this country, which more of Englandfrom this work, than out of most that are written for that he made himself during his residence on the Continent, and his journey very purpose. That in every contrast where PUBLICITY and PRACTICABILITY through the different States of Ger- are concerned, he assumes over us. many ; and he has used every endea- vour to picture to those of his country- men who might visit Germany, that for England a triumphant tone- is true, but his prophecyTaf-the-^tere of Germany is noble we sincerely which would excite their liveliest wish it may prove true. All that he interest. W hoever travels in a foreign says of our literature and art, as in country without being aware of its Munich, is excellently said: many peculiarities will find much that is dis- agreeable and uncomfortable, where chapters are real masterpieces of description, and the whole work dis- he does not know how to comply tinguishes itself as one of the most with its usages. It was therefore a correct and favourable representa- praiseworthy undertaking on the part of Mr. Howitt, to impart to his coun- tions of our life and circumstances which ever proceeded from the pen trymen all the information he could of an Englishman." obtain on the subject, and we are Allegmeinc Zeitung, Feb. 1843. convinced that his work will prove " We return our hearty thanks to a great acquisition to the English Howitt, whose work we have so often traveller in this country. Without quoted, for the extraordinary accu- this book, much that is highly in- racy, freedom, and nobility of spirit teresting will escape his notice." with which he has set himself to Jugel's Universal Mayazine. describe the life, character, and cir- " Howitt, a man of mature years, cumstances of our country." with all the youthful fire of poetry KSlniche Zeitung, March, 1843. V. THE STUDENT LIFE OF GERMANY. (From the unpublished MSS. of Dr. CORNELIUS.) WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS ON WOOD BY G. F. SAKGENT, Medium 8vo. with 24 Woodcuts and 7 Steel Plates, price 21s. cloth. " Mr. Howitt is right in his remark, " This work is a public benefit, that, taken as a whole, the volume and as such it cannot be too cordially contains more that is entirely new or earnestly recommended to our and curious than any one which has issued from the pross for years. readers It is elegantly 'got up,' and does credit in its appearance to * # # * the taste, liberality, and spirit of the It will be felt as a most charming addition to the book, that the music great publishers who have ushered it into the world. As the only com- of all the songs (in themselves a de- plete treatise on the subject of which lightful series) is given with, in every case, the original words." it treats the only complete treatise, be it remembered, in any tongue its Examiner, Oct. 16, 1841. value is incalculable." Observer. WILLIAM HOWITT S WORKS. THE BOY'S COUNTRY BOOK: BEING THE REAL LIFE OF A COUNTRY BOY, WRITTEN BY HIMSELF. 2d Edition, fcp. 8vo. with about 40 Woodcuts by S. WILLIAMS, price 8s. cloth. " A volume that children will de- light to read." Athenaum, Feb. 16, 1839. " It is with no common satisfaction that we introduce to our readers this little book a book which is the very best adapted to fill, occupy, and fascinate the leisure hours of the young." Atlas, Jan. 20, 1839. " We know of no book which we should be more apt to select as a present for a young person in whom we might feel interested." Chambers' Journal. " We have read this book as if it were some fairy chronicle of boyish days of our own, and have closed it with a sigh for the memory of those brief but sweetest pleasures which boyhood onlv knows." 'Examiner, April 6, 1839. " The style is healthy and animated, andl sufficiently plain to meet the capacity of boys at school; whilst t he numerous lively incidents, and the various congenial topics introduced, will rivet his attention, and afford him a wide field for gratification." Conservative, Jan. 20, 1839. " There is not in all England a more competent editor for such an autobiography as this, than the author of the 'Book of the Seasons;' nor are we aware that any other 'real life of a country boy ' could ever have been more naturally and heartily described. We see him in every pas- sage, we feel as if we actually heard him telling his story to a loved com- panion of kindred disposition Every boy in the British Empire should have a copy of this book ; and no one who delights in its pages can b > abadboy." Monthly Rev, March, 1839. " A delightful book, full of enjoy- ment and information, anecdote and adventure, such as boys like, told in a simple and hearty way, as one school-fellow would talk to another." Spectator, Jan. 20, 1839. " One of the most fascinating fie tions for young and old, but especially of the former, that has ever graced our literature." monthly Chronicle. " One of the most bewitching little volumes which we have read for a long time; full of the history of juvenile adventures ; and of the information- sterling, varied, and of lasting value which mature years have picked up. Though intended for the young, it will have, we venture to prophesy, many seniors among its admirers." Eclectic Review, April, 1839. COLONIZATION AND CHRISTIANITY: A Popular History of the Treatment of the Natives by the Europeans in all their Colonies. Post 8vo. price 10s. 6d. cloth. " The volume is full of a painful and tragical interest: it enforces a terrible lesson upon the consideration of the people of this country We know not, indeed, how any man could sit down to such a narrative calmly, and few men could have conducted it to a close with so much abilitv and dis- cretion." Atlas, July?, 1838. " We earnestly recommend this volume to the notice of our readers as a most masterly compendium of correct intelligence on all subjects connected with colonization, the slave trade, aud slavery." Evangelical Magazine, Sept. 1838. " There is enough to strike every feeling heart with horror and detesta- tion, and to call aloud for remedy and redress." Literary Gazette. "We have no hesitation in pro- nouncing (this volume) in its object and scope, the most important and valuable of any that he (Mr. Howitt) has yet produced." Tail's Magazine, Aug. 1838. " We cannot dismiss the volume without expressing our deep sense of its value, and of the service its pub- lication will render to the cause of humanity." Eclectic Review, Dec. 1838. WORKS BY MARY HOWITT. PUBLISHED BY LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, AND LONGMANS, PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON. THE NEIGHBOURS: A STORY OF EVERY-DAY LIFE. TRANSLATED FROM THE SWEDISH OF FREDERIKA BREMER. Third Edition, 2 vols., post 8vo., price 18s. boards. " The best novel published this sea- son ; and we are sure that it will not only afford great delight to the reading world, but have a beneficial influence on our literature." Britannia. " The execution of this exceedingly curious picture of manners is very feli- citous: minute in its touches, pains- taking with its details, and yet not so literal as life-like in its effects; re- sembling, in this respect, the care- fully laboured pictures of the Flemish school. In "The Neighbours' the reader will meet with something very different from anything to be found in English novels of the present day. Although a translation, it has all the ease and raciness of an original." Spectator. display under 1 These lively volumes graphically lay our social human nature ;r aspects new to the English reader." Atlas. " The great charm of this agreeable book is the fresh and life-like picture it furnishes of the domestic economy of Sweden. The scenes it unfolds, the characters it paints, the manners and habits it describes, are both original and obviously true to nature ; while the sentiments expressed throughout the narrative are at once amiable and pure, adapted to chasten the heart by rectifying the affections." Eclectic Review. THE HOME: OH, FAMILY CARES AND FAMILY JOYS. Second Edition, revised and corrected, 2 vols., post 8vo., price II. Is. boards. " It would certainly be ' omitting the part of Hamlet,' were we to close this invitation to ' The Home ' with- out speaking of the central figure in all its joys and sorrows the Mother. Nothing more delicate, or womanly, or beautiful is to be found in our domestic fiction than her character : and we like it none the less for a certain touch of romance and senti- ment not altogether English It is impossible to read this book as a piece of make-Miene. We have had nothing so simply life-like since Gait's ' Annals of the Parish ' uo pictures of female nature so finely touched, since Miss Austen's. As an illustra- tion of Northern life and manners, too, the tale has great value." Athenceum. " This new story, taken as a whole, fully sustains all that we said in praise of the penetrative subtlety, nice dis crimination, and exquisite'delicacv of touch, which are displayed in the first delightful fiction of Miss Bremer." Tait's Magazine. WORKS BY MARY HOWITT. 'THE HOME." Opinions of the Press continued. " Nothing like the works of this charming Swedish writer has ap- peared since Miss Austen. The prin- ciples which they inculcate are too sound, the facts which they detail are of too truthful and convincing a cha- racter, not to have been welcomed with the warmest terms of congratu- lation in this country. MissBremer's high and distinctive quality consists in Tier minute dissection of character, her eloquent detail of incident the warmth of tone with which she ex- presses every amiable feeling ; the unobtrusive, yet cogent manner in which she inculcates every stirring lesson of virtue the earnestness with which she endeavours to convince every one of the necessity of abhor- ring vice." Atlas. " A book which will assuredly fulfil the end for which it is written, and aflbrd delight to every one who can appreciate faithful pictures of the fairest side of human life, and find pleasure in indulging loving thoughts and pure affections. The Author has a right to claim from the press of this country the courtesy of an introduc- tion; and the critic's privilege in this case is truly one of the most grati- fying kind. Miss Bremer's portraits are drawn with exquisite truth, and are among the most purely natural descriptions ever penned.".BrVannza. "Ernst Frank, with his high prin- ciples, sound sense, and deep feeling, couched beneath a cold exterior, with Elise, his beautiful and loving wife, partaking largely of the virtues of her sex ; their eldest and only boy Hen- rik, the mother's 'summer child;' and their four daughters, each distin- guished from the others, and all pre- senting, whether apart or in combi- nation, a mixture of qualities adapted to awaken both the pride and the apprehension of their parents, consti- tute a group of which the like may occasionally be seen, and which, once beheld, can never be forgotten. Our youug friends and, if we mistake not, many old ones too will find these volumes full of interest, and it will not be the fault of their fair author if the effect of their perusal be not to strengthen domestic affections, and to correct many evils by which the happiness of home is impaired." Eclectic Review. THE PRESIDENT'S DAUGHTERS: INCLUDING NINA. TRANSLATED FROM THE SWEDISH OF FREDERIKA BREMER. Three vols., post 8vo., price 31*. 6d. boards. "Miss Bremer possesses beyond any other living writer of her class the power of realising to the imagination every individual she introduces. There is scarcely a single person in her multitudinous groups that does not stand out palpably in his living lineaments. The minute fidelity of her details, the vivid distinctness with which every mental struggle and secret emotion is traced; the moral beauty and womanly purity which steadily illuminate her narra- tive; and the calm Christian philo- sophy out of which all its earnest lessons of truth, and justice, and re- signation, and serene wisdom, are drawn, must receive implicit admi- ration on all hands." Examiner. " In the exhibition of every-day life in Sweden, so far as we are able to judge of it, Miss Bremer is without a rival, full of matter, close in obser- vation, characteristic in touch, and felicitous in expression, by the exact adaptation of style and diction to the thing described." Spectator. '"The President's Daughters' is a worthy companion to ' The Neigh- bours ' simple and truthful ; and though we may never have met else- where any one of the characters, all who have ever looked deeply into their own hearts will claim kindred and acquaintance with them. There is not one that offends by exaggera- tion - not one that is not recognised at a glance by the humanities of our common nature they are creatures of flesh and blood, and walk the stage of life as it has been trod for ages, and will be trod for ever. No impos sible vice, no super-human virtue, startles us in MissBremer's page : we recognise in her heroes and Heroines men and women with whom we our- selves could have lived and been happy." Athena-urn. WORKS BY MARY HOWITT. TALES FOR THE PEOPLE AND THEIR CHILDREN. Price 2s. 6d. each, in cloth. PUBLISHED BY THOMAS TEGG, CHEAPSIDE. STRIVE AND THRIVE.* HOPE ON! HOPE EVERIf SOWING AND REAPING. WHO SHALL BE GREATEST? WHICH IS THE WISER? LITTLE COIN, MUCH CARE. WORK AND WAGES. ALICE FRANKLIN. NO SENSE LIKE COMMON SENSE. * " We rejoice to see the works of the Howitts, whatever they be, re- published among us. Their names have a pleasant sound ; their writings are sure to be animated by a kindly, humane spirit ; and no one can leave them without feeling that he has been in delightful company." North A merican Review. t " This is the second specimen of a series of ' Tales for the People and their Children,' which has lately been commenced by one well fitted for the task; and truly a more delightful story, either for parent or child, we have seldom read. Mary Howitt pos- sesses, in a singular degree, that charming art, which so few writers can ever attain, of conveying the most sublime lessons of morality in a form at once as simple and as attractive as a fairy tale. And then the magic skill with which, by her deep, quiet, but earnest enthusiasm, she invests the most ordinary objects and inci- dents with poetic beauty ! Yet all is done with a degree of method, which renders her pictures alike harmoni- ous and free from dull formality. It is not merely that From common things which round us lie Some random truths she can impart.' The truths she teaches, though drawn from common sources, are never given at random. Impulsive though her genius be, it never parts company with her judgment ; and hence it may be truly said, that she possesses her genius, rather than she is possessed by it." WORKS FOR YOUTH. PUBLISHED BY DARTON AND CLARK, HOLBORN HILL. BIRDS AND FLOWERS, 12mo. cloth, 6s. TALES IN VERSE, 12mo. cloth, 3s. 6d. TALES IN PROSE, 16mo. 3s. 6d. HYMNS AND FIRESIDE VERSES, 12mo. 6s. SKETCHES OF NATURAL HISTORY, 16mo. cloth, 3s. 6d. IN THE PRESS. i. THE LIFE AND ADVENTURES OF JACK OF THE MILL, COMMONLY CALLED LORD OTHMILL. Two vols. small 8vo., beautifully illustrated with Wood-cuts. II. WANDERINGS OF A JOURNEYMAN TAILOR, (D. P. HOLTHAUS, from Werdohl, in Westphalia), THROUGH EUROPE AND THE EAST, DURING THE YEARS 1824 TO 1840. Translated from the Third Edition of the original German. 1 vol. small 8vo. III. GERMAN EXPERIENCES: ADDRESSED TO THE ENGLISH, BOTH GOERS ABROAD AND STAYERS AT HOME. One Volume small 8vo. K1WI1T?. STRIFE AND PEACE; OR, LIFE IN NORWAY: THE H FAMILY: AXEL AND ANNA; etc. 3 Vols. Post 8vo. FROM THE SWEDISH OF MISS BREMER. CHILD'S PICTUKE TH AND VERSE BOOK: COMMONLY CALLED OTTO SPECKTER'S FABLE-BOOK. This most admirable book for children, and their great favourite almost all over the Continent, from Poland to France, and especially to be found in every house in Germany where there are children, the Translator is bringing out in a new and unparalleled form ; t. e. with the text in GERMAN, FRENCH, and ENGLISH, so as to present not only a charming book of amusement for our children, but a capital first-book in the other two popular languages. The ^Hundred Woodcuts will be executed in a style superior to any of the Conti- nental ones, and the whole will be included at a price not exceeding that of the original with its single text. A celebrated German Review says, " Of this production, which makes of itself an epoch in the world of children, it is superfluous to speak. This Fable-Book is throughout all Germany in the hands of parents and children, and will always be new because every year fresh children are born." [Printed ty Manning and Mason, Ivy-lane, St. Paul's], EXERCISES WRITING GERMAN, ACCORDING TO THE RULES OF GRAMMAR. BY GEORGE HENRY NOEHDEN, LL.D. P H .D. , cormtrtf an& reb&rtr BY THE REV. C. H. F. BIALLOBLOTZKY, PH.D. EXAMINER IN GERMAN TO THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON, ETC. ETC. LONDON: PRINTED FOB LONGMAN, BROWN, GEEEN, AND LONGMANS;, DULAU AND CO. : WIIITTAKER AND CO. ; SIMPKIN, MAR- SHALL, AND CO. ; J. MAYNARD ; J. WACEY ; C. DOLMAN ; AND L. BOOTH. 1842. LONDON : Printed by A. SPOTTISWOODB. New- Street- Square. DR. NOEHDEN'S PREFACE FOURTH EDITION. BEFORE the student takes up his pen, he should carefully examine every note belonging to the sentence which he is about to translate; see to what words each note refers; then peruse the passages of the Grammar or Elements quoted, with attention; and, when he understands their application, finally write down the German. When a sentence is finished, the notes should be briefly reconsidered ; and, if every point in the exercise appear correct, the next sentence be proceeded with in the same manner. The rules of Orthography ought, from the first commencement, to be rigidly enforced. The minutest circumstances should be attended to. The notes of the Exercises seldom hint at this A 2 1057653 IV PREFACE. branch of grammatical practice ; but it is, not on that account, to be neglected. It must chiefly be left to the master's care, to see that justice is done to it. What has been said upon this subject, in the Grammar, from p. 21. to 30., will be read with advantage. It will be advisable for the student, when he begins to write, to make use immediately of the German hand. For it is necessary that he should be acquainted with this mode of forming the letters ; and, with a little patience and perse- verance, he will, in the progress of his exercises, easily acquire a readiness in that handwriting. The copperplate inserted in the Grammar, p. 22., will be of service, especially when accompanied by the advice of the teacher. The first five Sections of the Exercises em- brace the first, or elementary, Part of the Gram- mar. In them, not only the Grammar itself, but also the Elements, are quoted. These Sec- tions must be attentively and repeatedly prac- tised. The master may enlarge and multiply the examples; for they are by no means exhausted. By dwelling upon those Sections, it is not meant to be intimated, that the remaining three are of inferior moment. They demand an equal portion of care and attention ; but they may be considered as forming the second stage of the scholar's pro- gress. As a general maxim, repetition is strongly recommended : let the scholar tread his ground over and over again, till he is so intimately acquainted with every step which is to be taken that he may be able to find his way without the assistance of a guide. And this must not be looked upon as delay, or loss of time. It is the most profitable manner in which he can pro- ceed ; and it will, with the greatest certainty, put him in possession of an accurate knowledge of the language. When the student has written his exercise, and insured its correctness, let him transcribe it in a clean copy-book, with the page of the printed exercises quoted on the margin. This will have the following use. As he advances, he will oc- casionally, and in the second Part frequently, be referred to the examples that went before: then, in case of uncertainty, he will at once be able to recur to his former composition, and bring more efficaciously to his recollection the rule, or observation, concerning which he doubted. The arrangement, adopted in the first Part of the Exer- cises, and the superscriptions of the pages, greatly facilitate such references ; but the copy-book will be found an additional convenience. VI PREFACE. It sometimes happens, that a person is either negligent, or unsuccessful, in particular points of grammatical theory. He may, for example, be careless about the gender; or, perhaps, deficient in the use of the adjective forms, the compound verbs, or in any similar instance. If such a de- fect is perceived by the master, let him bring the pupil back to the place in the exercises where the rules infringed are exemplified; and detain him there, by continued practice, till the infirmity is thoroughly cured. When the course of the Exercises is accom- plished, it will remain for the student, by his farther industry and diligence, to cultivate and maintain his skill in writing. This may be done either by translation, or by original composition. But constant practice is required, to write well, and with ease : not a day should pass without it. It must be remembered, that knowledge acquired demands to be carefully preserved : without which care, the stock acquired will again diminish, and, perhaps, ultimately be lost. G. A. NOEHDEN. British Museum. ADVEKTISEMENT, IN this Seventh Edition of the late Dr. Noehden's Exercises for writing German the references have been corrected so as to agree with the Eighth Edition of the Author's German Grammar; and Dr. Noehden's Preface giving directions respect- ing the manner of writing the Exercises has been partly retained. Improvements have been intro- duced, as far as they appeared to be compatible with the intention of preserving the identity of Dr. Noehden's work. F.B. London, Nov. 1841. * By the same Author : A GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. Eighth Edition. 12mo. London, 1838. Price 8s. boards. A KEY TO NOEHDEN'S GERMAN EXERCISES. By SCHULTZ. Fourth Edition. 3s. Qd. boards. RABENHORST'S POCKET DICTIONARY of the GERMAN and ENGLISH LANGUAGES, printed uniformly with Nugent's and Graglia's Dictionaries. By G. H. NOEHDEN, LL.D. Ph.D. Fourth Edition, revised and improved by D. BOILEAU. 12s. bound. EXERCISES. PART I. PRACTICE ON THE RULES OF GRAMMAR. SECTION I. ON THE ARTICLE; THE GENDER; AND THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 1. Article and Gender.* THE (1) King and the Queen; likewise the prince and the princess ; the bishop and the abbot ; the abbess and the nun; the landlord and the land- * See the Grammar, p. 109. and 1 1 1. ; the Elements, p. 3 and 4. The article, whether definite or indefinite, must agree with the noun to which it belongs, in gender, number, and case. Gr. p. 388. A noun substantive always commences with a capital letter. Gr. 22. 1. (1) Names and appellations of males are masculine, of females, feminine. Rule ] . Masculine, and feminine gender. Gr. 112. and 114. El. 4. B 2 Rules of Grammar. Part I. lady. A sailor, a soldier ; a tailor, a shoemaker ; a waiting-woman a and a sempstress. (1) [The] summer, [the] spring, [the] autumn, and [the] winter. The month (2) of January, the (month (2) of) May, the (month (2) of) December. [The] Monday and [the] Tuesday ; [the] Wednesday, as well (3) as [the] Thursday ; likewise [the] Friday and [the] Saturday; and also [the] Sunday. Not only [a] north wind 1 ' (4), but also [an] eastwind c ; [a] west wind d and [a] south wind 6 . [The] north-east wind f and [the] south-west wind g . (5) [The] flint and [the] limestone; [the] (1) Masculine gender. Gr. 112. Rule 2. El. 4. Rule 4. Germanisms have been put in brackets. (2) The words month of are to be omitted ; and you are to say, The January, the May, &c. (3) As well as, fo Wofyl flB rtlld)/ or fo tt>of)l al3 See Gram. 381. EL 106. OttJOfyl is generally put before the first substantive, and alg aud), or al, before the second, thus : OttJOfyl bet (4) But, after a negative, to be expressed by fonbern. Gram. 382. El. 106. (5) Gr. 112. Masculine gender. Rule 3. El. 4. Rule 5. a 2f,ufrodrtertn, ^ammerjungfer* b Sjfttrinb ; d SOBejfttrinb* e ubtvinb* f Sftorboftnrinb* ubroejfttrinb* Sect. I. 1. Article and Gender. 3 amethyst and [the] emerald ; [the] diamond and [the] ruby ; [the] porphyry and [the] granite. (1) The ring; the courtier* and the odd fellow b ; the sparrow and the linnet. (2) A plum and a pear ; an apricot and a peach. The grape and the nut; the pink and the tulip ; the rose and the lily. (3) The Danube c , the Elbe, the Weser, (1) Gr. 112. Masculine gender. Rule 4, El. 4-. Rule 6. (2) Gr. 114. Feminine gender. Rule 2. El. 4. Rule 2. (3) Compare Murray's larger Grammar, on Punctu- ation. Chap. 1. Rule 3. "When two or more nouns occur in the same construction, they are parted by a comma : as, ' Reason, virtue, answer one great aim/ ' The husband, wife, and children suffered extremely.' From this rule there is mostly an exception, with regard to two nouns closely connected by a conjunc- tion : as, ' Virtue and vice form a strong contrast to each other.' ' Libertines call religion bigotry or su- perstition : ' * There is a natural difference between merit and demerit, virtue and vice, wisdom and * b onberling, c bie JDonau* The names of most of the other rivers here mentioned, are the same in German as in English. B 2 4 Rules of Grammar. Part I. and the Moselle 3 ; the Thames b and the Humber; the Rhone and the Seine ; the Tiber and the Vis- tula . (1) (2) Not a separation, (3) but a combination; not (4) [the] dependence, but [the] liberty. [The] country. [The] friendship and [the] enmity. [The] folly.' But if the parts connected are not short, a comma may be inserted, though the conjunction is expressed : as, ' Intemperance destroys the strength of our bodies, and the vigour of our minds.' " In German, the comma is mostly omitted before unb* See Gr. 26. b. (1) Feminine gender. Gr. 114. Rule 3. El. 4. Rule 3. (2) Feminine gender. Gr. Rule 4. p. 114. and 7- p. 115. El. Rule 4. p. 4. It may here be noticed, that the terminations et and et) are entirely the same ; and that, if some persons suppose there is a difference, it is imaginary. But modern orthography requires simply et : bie cfymeicfyelet, flattery ; bie eud)elei, hypocrisy. (3) But, after a negative, fonbetlU See before, p. 2. note 4. (4) The definite article, in the subsequent exam- ples, sounds uncouth, according to the English usage ; but this awkwardness is unavoidable in similar ex- bie SSKofeL b bie $&emfe* c bte SBefdtfel* Sect. I. 1. Article and Gender. 5 magnanimity and [the] humility. [The] flattery and [the] hypocrisy. A corporate society a . The jaundice and pulmonary consumption 15 . The na- tive country or home. (1) [The] A and [the] B; likewise [the] F and [the] G; [the] K and [the] L. (2) [The] gold, [the] silver, [the] lead, [the] tin, [the] copper, [the] brass, [the] iron, [the] ore. (3) The bishopric, the principality, the duke- dom, the sanctuary. (4) The little child, the little boy. The little son, and the little daughter. The little dog, and the little cat. The little book, and the little table. The little girl. (5) [The] sleeping and [the] waking; [the] reading and [the] writing. [The] weeping and (1) Neuter Gender. Gr. 1 16. Rule 1. El. 5. (2) Neuter Gender. Gr. 116. Rule 2. El. 5. (3) Neuter Gender. Gr. Rule 4. p. 1 17. El. Rule 7. p.5. (4) Diminutives. Neuter gender. Gr. Rule 7. p. 11 7. El. Rule 4. p. 5. The idea, little, is here not to be ex- pressed by the adjective, flettt, but by giving to the sub- stantive a diminutive form, concerning which it is neces- sary to refer to the Grammar, p. 140. Observation 5. (5) The action of the verb expressed substantively, a )ie 3ttVtft/ a Guild, a company of tradesmen or artificers. b @d)tt>tnt>fucl)t / f. B 3 6 Rules of Grammar. Part I. [the] smiling ; the sneezing and the snoring. [The] painting and [the] drawing ; also [the] seeing and [the] admiring. (1) The farewell ! The alas ! The (2) black, the white, the blue, the yellow. The (3) fertile a (4) (country of) (5) Germany b ; which is, m English, rendered by the participle, is in German expressed by the infinitive. See the Gr. 343. The rule to be applied is the 5th on the neuter gender. Gr. 117. El. 5. (1) Words which are not substantives, having, for the purpose of distinction, the definite article prefixed, are of the neuter gender. Gr. 117. Rule 6. El. 5. (2) On this mode of converting adjectives into sub- stantives, see Gr. 189. 2. (3) The adjectives, which are here to be employed, will at once be put in their right form, below, so that the student will have nothing farther to do, than to transcribe them in their places, as they are numbered. (4) The words placed in parenthesis are to be left out in German. (5) The names of countries and places may, in German, be joined with an adjective and an article, without the intervention of any other word, thus: The fertile Germany, the cold Russia, the hot India, the Sect. I. 1. Article and Gender. 7 the cold a (country of) Russia b ; the damp c (country of) Holland; and the well cultivated 11 Belgium. The hot 6 (climate of) India f , and the frozen 5 (region of) Lapland. The free h (nation of) Great Britain', and the lively" (people of) France *. The great" 1 ,(city of) London, and the gay" (city of) Paris ; the beautiful (city of) Bath, and the charming P (town of) Naples. cold Lapland, the great London, the free Britain ; the auxiliary terms made use of, in English, such as, country of, climate of, region of, city of, nation of, being omitted. These terms are, in the above exer- cise, put in parenthesis, to indicate that they are, in German, to be left out. The names of countries and places themselves are to be considered as of the neuter gender, according to Rule 3. Gr. 116. El. 5. a falte* b Oilplant* c feucfyte* d wofylangebaute* e fceiffe* t Snbfen. eiSfalte* h freie. * rog SSrttannien* k lebljafte* > Sranfreid), n luflige* fc^one. P vet^ent>e Slea^el* B 4 8 Rules of Grammar. Part I. 2. The Four Declensions of Substantives.^ (1) The sister, the brother, the boy, and the child. The cat, the tiger, the hare, the dog. The pen and the ink ; the penknife, the inkstand, and the paper. The aunt a and the uncle; the niece and the nephew. (2) The physician and the b divine*; the c law- yer* and the orator; the poet and the female singer d ; the actress 6 and the sophist*. The nose, the eye, the lip, and the face. The breast, the heart*, the hand, the finger, the foot. The skin f , the nail, and the hair. The tongue, the palate, and the tooth. f See the Gr. from 129. ; and the El. from 5. (1) The distinction of the declension is here exemplified. (2) The words marked thus (*) belong to the third declension, though they are not comprehended in the general rule. They are enumerated in the third Ob- servation on that declension. Gr. 145. El. 13.; with which the learner must render himself familiar. a bie Sftufyme* b ber S^eolog, ber eijHicfye, ber otteSgelefjrte* c ber 3Reci)tSgelef)rte, ber Sutffh bic dngerinru e bie cfyaufptelennn* f Sect. I. 2. Declensions of Substantives. 9 The snake, the lion, the elephant*, the rein- deer. The cow, the ox *, the ass, the pig, and the sheep. The soldier*, the scholar*, the student*, the candidate*, the prelate*. The shepherd b and the c herdsman*: the d prince* and the e subject*. The earth, the land, the f rock*. The e count*, the hero*. A brute animal h , and a human being*. The k simple ton* and the dunce 1 ; a Jesuit * and a Cossack *. (1) The cares and the joys; the thoughts and the feelings. The knives and the forks ; the plates and the dishes. The rewards and the punishments ; the difficulties and the dangers. The hands, the arms, the legs. The bows, the (2) crossbows, the swords, the javelins. The wars and the battles. The necessities" 1 and the sufferings. The boys and the girls ; the mothers and the daughters. (1) The plural number of the different declensions. (2) Gr. 140. 4. a ber cfyuler* b ber cfyafer* c ber ^)irt d ber urjl, ^)rin e ber Untertfyan. f ber $eB g ber raf. h etn SSief)/ etn Sfyier* l etn SJlenfd), m. k ber Sropf J ber cfyopS, ber Summlopf, ber 9)infel, m ba -JBeburfm^, or bte S'lot^ B 5 10 Rules of Grammar. Parti. (1) Three (2) pears and five (3) apples. Two (4) men and twenty (5) wolves. A thou- sand (6) houses and two (5) palaces ; twelve ('2) doors and six (3) gardens. The (2) times, the (5) circumstances, and Uie (5) wishes. The (2) floods a , the (5) r'vers, the (4) wells b , and the boats. The (4) letters (of the alphabet), the (2) writings, the (3) concerns , and the (5) proposals' 1 . (3) Cloaks, (3) threads, (3) hammers, (2) freights, (2) burdens, (2) posts 6 , (2) forms, (2) debts, (2) tracks. (4) Advocates, (4) fools, (4) Janis- saries, (4) tyrants. (6) Bodies f , (6) spirits, (6) leaves, (6) books, (5) heads, (5) frogs, (5) cocks. (1 ) Words which deviate, in the plural number, from the common rules. Concerning the numerals, here used, see Gr. 201. El. 30 Before hundred and thou- sand, it is not usual, in German, to put the indefinite article, which is done in English : as a hundred pounds, a thousand pounds ; the article in German is left out, as hundred pounds, thousand pounds. See Gr. 206. 5. (2) Gr. 135. El. 8. 3. (3) Gr. 140. 4. El. 10. 2. (4) Gr.145.3. El. 13. Man is here to be taken in its most general sense, for human being, and to be expressed by ber 9ftenfd? (5) Gr. 150. 3. El. 17. 2. (6) Gr. 149. 2. 152. 3. El. 16. 1. 17. 2. a bie glutft* b bet 33runm c bte * ber Borfcblag, e bie $ojt* f ber fietb, Sect. I, 2. Declensions of Substantives. 1 1 * The benches and the (1) banks (places for keeping money). (2) The sofas, the climates. (3) The fellows, (4) the peasants, the slippers ; the eyes, the strings, the ends. (5) The Christians, the princes. (6) The cheeses, the palaces. (7) The affections, the diamonds, the insects % the ears, the pains, the spurs, the states, the subjects. (8) The valleys and the dales; the bonds, the volumes, and the ribands; the faces and the visions ; the dominions and the countries; the garments and the drapery (with painters) ; the candles and the lights (with painters). (9) The daughter of the woman, and the son of the man. The friend of the father, and the brother of the mother. The flowers of the garden, and the trees of the forest. The fruits of the land, and the riches of the sea. The * Irregularities in the formation of the plural num- ber of several words. (1) See Gr. 136. 3. (5) Gr. 145. 2. (2) Gr. 139.2. (6) Gr. 147. 6. (3) Gr. 139.3. (7) Gr. 151.4. (4) Gr. 142. 6. (8) Gr. 152. 5. (9) Cases of the different declensions. briefer or e^iefer* Entomology, B 6 12 Rules of Grammar. Parti. inhabitants of the island, and the subjects of the king. The nature of (1) man, and the inclination of the heart. Two pears, (2) instead of a one apple. With b a knife and a fork. From the room into d the garden, and then along 6 the river, as far f as the wood. By means s of a wall, on this side 11 of the brook. On the other side 1 of the mountain ; on the outside k of the gate, and above 1 the hill, within" 1 the boundaries. According to" the de- (1) Sftenfd)/ masculine gender, third declension, the general term for one of the human species. Terms of a comprehensive and general signification, such as man, in this place, require the article in German, the nature of the man. Gr. 391. 1. (2) In treating of the cases, an opportunity is af- forded of using the prepositions, which will accord- ingly be done in the following exercises. Concerning the prepositions, see the Grammar, from 356. to 375., and the El. from 99. to 104-. a attfhtt* Gr. 356. b m it, Gr. 361. ' auS* Gr. 359. d in. Gr. 370. e lanQS, Gr. 360. { MS oberftalb* Gr. 357. innerhalb, Gr. 357. n na$* Gr. 361. Sect. I. 2. Declensions of Substantives. 13 scription of the boy, six persons, besides* the children. Through 15 the town, without a coat. In d the hall, and about 6 (around) the table. For f the value of the money ; against 6 the friend of the master' 1 . On account 1 of the war, and during k the winter. By the power 1 of (1) ambition, for the sake 111 of (1) glory, notwithstanding" the danger, and in spite of all dangers. By p the river, and opposite q to the castle. With six thousand soldiers, besides the horsemen. From r the moment of the dispersion. In consequence 3 of the orders, towards 1 the centre point of the army. In a letter to" the minister, upon x the (1) Say: of the ambition; of the glory. See the last note but one, and the Grammar, there quoted, 391. 1. a atljjer* Gr. 359. b burd). Gr. 363. c ofyne. Gr. 364. err, the third declension. Gr. 145. 3. a ber 3uftor* Gr. 372. "' unter* Gr. 371. k ber5urff !toor*Gr.372. ^inter, Gr. 370. uber Gr. 371. urn willem Gr. 357. Sect. I. 2. Declensions of Substantives. 15 and the ferocity a of a barbarian. The rewards of (1) obedience; the love of (2) God; a covenant with God. The admonitions of the pastor (1); and the example of the neighbour. (1) (3) Thirty miles, a hundred fathoms, seven yards, five inches. Three ounces of sugar ; four pounds of sealing-wax, ten quires of paper, six parcels 5 of pens, Fifty dozens of wine, and twelve casks of beer. Twelve head of cattle; twenty stone of beef. Three pairs of shoes, nine pairs of stockings. A horse sixteen hands (4) high, a (1) Words in am, ar, or. Gr. 149. 1. (2) The genitive and dative cases of Ott. Gr. 149. 1. (3) Words implying measure, weight, quantity. Gr. 156. 3. Substantives of that description are seldom used in the plural number, excepting bic SDMle, the mile ; tie (Stte, the yard, or ell ; t>te UnjC, the ounce. The substantives, which follow such words, are not declined, but remain in the nominative case, though the English language requires the pre- position of. Gr. 1 58. (4) The English adjective occupies here the same place as the German, namely, after the substantive fifteen feet long, fimfsefyn uf lang. * ber rimm* b ba SSunb, Gr. 156. gauff* Gr. 156. 16 Rules of Grammar. Parti. man (1) weighing eighteen stone. Nine pieces of cloth, two yards wide. (2) The Iliad a (3) of Homer, and the ^neid b of Virgil. Gellert's comedies, and Lessing's tra- gedies. Johnson's works, and Dryden's poems. The beauties of Flora, and the sheaves of Ceres. With (4) Cicero and Demosthenes; for (5) Pitt and Fox. (6) Moritz's travels, Frisch's dictionary, and Schulz's observations. (7) Frederica's gentle- (1) Weighing, to be rendered by fd)n?er, heavy ; and to stand after the quantity mentioned. (2) Proper names. Gr. 160. El. 19. (3) Refer to Gr. 164-. about the middle. (4) The preposition mtt with, governs the dative case. The dative and accusative cases, in proper names, are, generally, best formed by means of the article. The termination it or en/ for those cases, can hardly be admitted in good language. Gr. 164. in the middle. It is not uncommon, especially after pre- positions, when the case intended cannot be mistaken, to dispense both with the termination and the article. (5) For, fur, governs the accusative. (6) Gr. 163. at the top. (7) Gr. 163. >ie SliaS, or Sliabe* h bic 2Cenei, or TCenetfre, Sect. I. "2. Declensions of Substantives. 17 ness% and Amelia's b vivacity. (1) The valour of Achilles, and the piety of ^neas ; the victory of Camillus, and the patriotism of Brutus. Fifty years before the birth (2) of Christ. (3) The code c of the emperor Justinian; the life of the poet Klopstock. King William's campaigns ; ad- miral Nelson's battles. The correspondence be- tween (4) the prince d Stahremberg and Mr. Secre- tary Canning. The history (5) of John Christopher Gatterer; the translations of Augustus William von Schlegel ; the writings of Charles Henry Adol- phus Weber. The monument of Leopold Joseph (6) de Bulow; the picture of Lewis Godfrey de (1) Gr. 163. The genitives of these proper names should be rendered by the article. (2) In this phrase, the Latin genitive case, (Sfyttftt/ is very commonly made use of, namely : t)0t Gifyttjll ebttrt, before the birth of Christ. (3) Gr. 165. at the top of the page. (4) Gr. 167. above. (5) The genitive case placed before the word which governs it. Gr. 164. (6) The particle de, of, in German Won, designates a nobleman. Gr. 165. baS efefcbud d ber 18 Rules of Grammar. Part I. Golz. The reign (1) of George (2) the First, king (3) of England. The heroes (4) of Greece% and the generals of Rome. The poets of Ger- many, and the philosophers of England. (5) The Homers, the Virgils; the Newtons, the Leibnitzes; the Schillers, the Schlegels, the (1) Gr. 165. (2) The first, genitive case, t>e (3) Of, won. Gr. 395. 1. (4-) Names of countries, in the genitive case, placed before the words by which that case is governed. Gr. 166. at the top. (5) The plural number of proper names is seldom required. When it is wanted, the best mode of form- ing it seems, in general, to be that of following the four declensions according to the terminations of the names. Gr. 166. El. 20. 3. In many instances, how- ever, an uncouthness would arise, if that method were strictly adhered to ; for example, in the names Bacon, Priestley, which, according to rule, should make the plural SSflCOne, $)nef!let)e* This may be obviated by employing the letter 3, for the plural, as is done with some words of the second declension. Gr. 139. : SpriefHepS, 33acon3* Proper names of the masculine gender, ending in c and jj, ought to make their plural, after the third declension, by the termination en. But necfyenlanb* Sect. II. I. Forms of Adjectives. 19 Goethes, the Wielands. The Bacons, the Priest- leys ; the Minervas, the Corinnas, the Sapphos. SECTION II. ON THE ADJECTIVE, AND PRONOUN. 1. The Four Forms of Adjectives.* (1) Black, white, red, blue. Hot, cold, light, dark. The spring warm and pleasant ; the au- this might be mistaken for the female ending, instead of in (Gr. 166. above), bte oethen, for bie oethin, Mrs. or Miss Goethe : for which reason, it seems to be preferable to assign those which end in ft to the fourth declension, as, Sfyeopfyraft, plural, bte SSfyeo* pfyrfljle 5 and those in e are perhaps best distinguished by the termination tt> bte OetfyenS, bte et)nen6 ; or they may be left unaltered in the plural : bte oetfye, bte f)Ct)ne* Most of the female names may have their plural in ett ; those in 0, in on : the latter may also be made in , as, bte appfyoS* * See Gr. from 169. to 189.; and the El. 2226. (1) The First Form of Adjectives. Gr. 169 and 170. El. 22. The first is the form in which the adjective appears in the dictionary. The participles, in the following exercises, are to be considered as adjectives, and to be dealt with by the same rules. Gr. 187. VIII. 20 Rules of Grammar. Part I. tumn wet and unhealthy. The brook clear and flowing 3 ; the mountain high and steep. Eugene b bold, yet courteous; Charles brave and ardent . The wine is (ift) good, the beer is bad. I call (id) nenne) the bread tolerable, but the meat d ex- cellent. The Greeks 6 were (war en) ingenious, the Romans f warlike; the French 6 are (ftnb) lively, the English 11 reflecting 1 ; the Germans* industrious 1 , the Dutch'" persevering and diligent". (1) Sweet wine, new milk, fine p honey. Great fame, distinguished" 1 bravery, and (2) high merit. Fertile fields and rich harvests. Good highroads', (1) The Second Form of Adjectives. Gr. 169. 171. EL 22. In this and the following forms, it is necessary to anticipate a rule from the Second Part of Grammar, viz. that an adjective must agree with the substantive before which it is placed, in gender, number, and case. Gr. 397- Rule I. The same ap- plies to pronouns, and participles. (2) This adjective is fyod), in the first form ; in the other forms, the d), at the end, is changed to fy ; for example, in the second, fyofyer, fyofye, fyofyeS, Gr. 54. note. 182. II. 191. a flie$enb c bie riecfyem f bte Corner* * bte gnrnjofem h bic (Sngldnber. ' nacfyt>enfent> k bte >eutfd)en. l ar* beitfann m bte 4)ollanber n flei^ig* frtfd;* P fetUf Sect. II. I. Forms of Adjectives. 21 and navigable rivers. Valiant soldiers, and peace- ful citizens. The nourishment of good bread, and the benefit of salubrious air. The enjoyment of innocent mirth 3 , in the society of pleasant friends. With free will, and perfect independence, out of a small fortune. By dint b of great patience, and by means of prudent measures. After extraordi- nary difficulties, besides* 5 unavoidable loss. With- out proper 6 industry, and against powerful com- petitors. For base gain, and through detestable artifices. From enviable opulence, into wretched poverty. Between intimate friends, and before impartial judges. ( 1 ) The value of good old Spanish wine ; the strength of genuine, high-flavoured 5 brandy. Six casks of fine, white, West-Indian' 1 sugar. Two bushels' of excellent English* barley. A pint of good, rich 1 , new milk. A number" 1 of liberal, compassionate, and virtuous people. With great, noble, and quick resolution. (2) All honest men, and several heroic women. Some pretty poems, and sundry learned treatises. (1) Gr. 172. 1. (2) Gr. 172. 2. a btc ^vofyltcfyfeit. b wermoge* c wermtttelj!* d nebjf. e gefyortg, f erbarmlicfy, flagHd)* * fcfymac! fyaft, h SBefttnbtfc^ l ber @d)effer, ^gngliffy* i fetf. m bte grojje ^njafyl, 22 Rules of Grammar. Part I. Such remarkable letters, and many other curious a passages. The contents of many instructive writ- ings, and the weight of such living h examples. The duty of all pious Christians ; the inclination of many wicked citizens. The exertion c of several enlightened princes d ; the prejudices of (1) a few old-fashioned 6 people, and the wishes of some f ill- disposed^ and selfish' 1 persons. (2) Very fertile soil ; extremely cold water. Much violent rain, and little dry weather. Some hard frost, and yet very frequent wet'. Fifty strong men, and a hundred little children ; about k sixty young women. (3) All kinds 1 of ancient coins ; different sorts" 1 of beautiful medals. (4) The sagacious" elephant, the wily serpent, and the spirited" horse. The white swans, and the black crows. The ravenous wolves, and the guiltless lambs. (1) In German, the indefinite article is not used before wemge/./htf. Gr. 394. at the top of the page. But etntge is the word to be used here. (2) Gr. 174. 3. (3) Gr. 174. 3. 183. and 21 1. IV. (4) The Third Form of Adjectives. Gr. 175 179. El. 2224. a fonberbar, auffattenb* b lebenb, c ba 33ej!rebem d ber S^ft* e flltmobtfcfy. f mancbe* h felbftfucfettg. { bte 9Mffe. k etroa, 1 alkrleu m mancfyerleu n fiitg, muting. Sect. II. 1. Forms of Adjectives. 23 This great victory, and ( 1 ) that sanguinary bat- tle. Those wonderful exploits, and these bene- ficial consequences. Every sensible* man, and many a prudent youth. Which reasonable con- clusion, from b those striking incidents' 1 ; which firm 6 conviction, after that long experience. From f this fatiguing g journey into the distant parts h (2) of Europe: the speedy return of that beloved person. The certain effect of those severe measures upon 1 the tender feelings of this esti- mable 1 ' youth. With every desirable advantage, and without the smallest 1 cause of (3) regret" 1 . From the generous 11 bounty of the good old man to the impoverished 11 inhabitants of that desolated q country. Through the united 1 " efforts of the well- disposed 8 subjects of this extensive 1 empire. (4) Many a worthy man; we have many a melan- choly example ; many virtuous men, the valuable (l) Sener, jene, jeneS. (2) SBoru Gr. 397. 1. (3) Say: of the regret. Gr.391. 1. (4) SJftcmcfycr, Gr. 177. 179. b au, prep. dat. c auffallenb. e fejh f t>otu * ermubenb. h bte egenb* ! auf, prep. ace. k rourbtg. l gertngjl, superlative degree. m bte 9leue n ebe( an, prep, ace. P tterarmt. i \jcrwfi|lct 8 gutgeftnnt* 24 Rules of Grammar. Part I. life of many an innocent human (1) being, be- sides* the immense wealth b of the mercantile branch of that opulent city. In d those terrible scenes 6 of the last civil war f ; the common prudence of every loyal 8 inhabitant, in this unhappy town. The (2) aforesaid rigorous law, and the above- mentioned ancient regulation. The (3) above- stated important limitation and definition. (4) A true and just sentence 11 ; an impressive 1 and sufficient excuse ; a kind and friendly word. On account oP a slight error, in 1 a vast under- taking, with an astonishing" 1 loss. A due recom- pence to" an old and faithful servant, for long and steady services. (1) Human being, ber ^JZcrtfd), third declension. (2) These, and similar participles, befflCJt, aforesaid, $ebiict)t and entXlfynt, before mentioned, require the adjective, before which they happen to be placed, to be in the third form. Gr. 178. 2. They are fre- quently employed without an article, and resemble demonstrative pronouns. (3) Above stated may be expressed by Qebfld)f* (4) The Fourth Form of Adjectives. Gr. 178 182. El. 2426. a nebft/ prep. dat. b ber Retd)tbum c begutert* d bet/ prep. dat. e ber Tfuftrttt* f ber 83urger!rieg, the civil war. e treitgeftnnf* h fc er 2Cufprud) 1 etnbrucBttott, k roe^en, prep. gen. i bet, prep. dat. m erflaunlid). n an, prep. ace. Sect. II. 1 . Forms of Adjectives. 25 (1) The names of two brave men, and the memory of three humane soldiers. The comparison of two or three different crea- tures. The advantage of two enlightened a opi- nions, and the judgment of three wise, calm b , and honest friends. (2) Both the young persons, with [both] the old and happy parents. The joy of both the little children, and the gaiety of both the grown-up c boys. (3) No rational and conscientious father, no tender and prudent mother, no dutiful d and obe- (1) The numerals tt)d and bm, two and three, before adjectives. These numerals are capable of in- flection, in the genitive and dative, and then govern the adjective in the fourth form. Gr. 180. El. 24. (2) SSetbe, both, is commonly used, in German, without the article, and, like tt>et, bret, causes the adjective to stand in the fourth form. Gr. 180. Say here, Both young persons, both old and happy pa- rents, both grown-up boys. The article may be, and is often, employed, especially in the genitive and dative cases, and after prepositions ; but then it always precedes betbe, and the adjective following must be considered in the third form : as, nttt ben betben alten tinb glucflicfyen 2elfern+ (3) The negative adjective fettU Gr. 180. El. 25. a aufgeflart* b gelajfetu c etwacfyferu d pfltd;f> 26 Rules of Grammar. Part I. dient child. The principles of no human law, the doctrines of no known a science. From b no intel- ligible cause, and with no assignable* 1 object 6 . Through no particular obstacle, and against no great resistance ; for f no laudable and honourable purpose 5 . No similar circumstances, no danger- ous times, no grievous oppressions. On account of no extraordinary (1) misfortunes, through no pardonable errors, from no unexpected occur- rences. In no civil wars b , between no furious and revengeful enemies. (2) Wretched man that I am ! thou in- nocent child ! To thee', ungrateful youth; and for you k , unfeeling 1 friends ! We short-sighted mortals, you deluded" 1 creatures; to us n perishable (1) )ie UttQlucfSfatte, plur. The singular number of this word is ber Unglurf Sfatt/ or, as a substitute for it, ba3 UnglM . The latter has no plural number, but must borrow it from the former. There are several substantives, which have to take their plurals from others. Gr. 154. B. 1. (2) Personal pronouns, before Adjectives. Gr. 181. El. 25, 26. Germanice, / wretched man. befaimt. b au3, prep. dat. begwfltcfy* d nam* haft* e ber 3roeeutfd}e, the German, third form ; etn 2)eittfd)er, 25eutfd)en, a German, of a German, fourth form. * finb, c 3 30 Mules of Grammar. Part I. philosophers are not always learned men. The expenses of a traveller. My relation % with the fair lady b . The orders of the colonel, through his servant The lover c of a fair lady. The laws of the Sublime, and the observations concerning the Beautiful. Our servants and their acquaint- ances. The lovers of those fair ones. (1) The blue and the yellow; the splendour d of the red, against the refulgence 6 of the white. The black, together with f the brown. The gray behind the purple. The rotundity of the earth. 2. The Comparison of Adjectives.* (2) One book more valuable than another ; this river deeper than that. Six men more powerful than five. (3) The oak harder than the fir; the boy stronger than the girl. The master 5 poorer than his servant 11 ; the son greater than his father. The (1) Adjectives made substantives by abstraction Gr. 189. 2. * Gr. 189 201. El. 26 29. (2) Comparative degree. Gr. 190, 191. El. 26, 27. (3) The vowels a, 0, II, changed into a, 6/ U, in the comparative degree. Gr. 190. 1. El. 27. 1. a met.n 83em>anbter. b bte cfyone* c ber eltebte, d ber lan, e ber tfyein* f nebfl. * ber h ber JDiener* Sect. II. 2. Comparison of Adjectives. 31 brother younger than the sister ; the days shorter than the nights. (1 ) The spring more rough than the winter. Hypocrisy more false than treachery; a face paler than (2) ashes. A tree more hollow than a nutshell ; a youth more rude a than a pea- sant. A step more clumsy b than the motion of a cart-horse d ; a dress more party-coloured 6 than a harlequin's f jacket. A man more timid than a hare, more tractable than a sheep. A lady g more virtuous than Lucretia, a tyrant more vicious than Tarquin. His principles are' 1 more odious 1 than his actions, his doctrines more abominable k than his example. (3) A heart more noble, an understanding more perfect. His conduct more open, his coun- tenance 1 more dark" 1 . The air drier, the taste bitterer, the hero braver. The mountain higher. (1) Exceptions in the foregoing observations, where tlie vowels are not changed. Gr. 190. 1. (2) Say : bte Tffcfye, which is a noun singular. This saying, paler than ashes, or as pale as ashes, is, however, not usual in German. A similar mode of speaking, in that language, is, fo tt>etJ3 tt)tC bie SBanb, white as the wall, (3) Gr. 191. 2. El. 272. roh, ungeftttet* b plump* c ber ang* d ber e bunt* f ber ^javteftn* g ba3 rauen Dimmer, bie rau. u ft'nb* ! werfyagf. k abfd)eultd> 1 bie effcfytsbilbung, Sttiene* m bimfel, fmffer* c 4 32 Rules of Grammar. Part I. ( 1 ) Finer sand, blacker ink, whiter paper. The utility of (2) purer metal ; the durability of stronger timber. The quality of drier earth, the effect of harder water. With greater zeal ; from warmer passions. Through more vehement an- ger, into more painful affliction. More silly words, and more prudent actions. By means of more perfect a accounts of b earlier years. For wiser counsels. Against more estimable privileges. (3) The brighter day, the darker night, the hotter fire. The name of the younger brother, the authority of the elder sister, and the smile of (1) Hitherto the comparative degree has been ex- hibited in the first adjective form. It will now be represented in the three remaining forms. Gr. 191. 3. El. 27. 3. (2) It is remarked, Gr.172. 1., that, for the purpose of avoiding the repetition of the termination e3/ the genitive case of adjectives, in the masculine gender second form, is, before substantives, with the ending C, or , sometimes formed in en* This expedient, of substituting Ctt for c/ is frequently resorted to in the comparative degree, to obviate the monotony of a reiterated ending, which, especially in long words, has an unpleasant effect. (3) The third form, applied to the comparative degree. Gr. 192. (c). Sect. II. 2. Comparison of Adjectives. 33 the more beautiful child. Out of the broader road, into the narrower path. With this more beauti- ful coach, and those uglier horses. In the smaller book, through the longer chapter. The more abstruse sciences*; for the more superficial acquirements b in the fine arts c . (1) A nobler glory, a more certain honour, a more tranquil fortune. The influence of a more powerful man, the persuasion of a more beautiful woman, the hope of a more easy d life. After a more difficult struggle 6 , against f a more obstinate enemy. With a more crafty artifice, and to a more pernicious purpose 5 . In a more fertile country, and near h a more con- siderable river. From a more populous city, into a more desolate 1 village. Within k a wider circle, and by means of 1 a freer enquiry" 1 . My later arrival, and thy more expeditious mes- senger. His earlier notions, and your more difficult precepts. The tranquillity of their more (1) The fourth form, applied to the comparative degree. Gr. 192. (c?). a ttef. b bie .ftenntmjj* c bie fcfy&nen Jtunfte. d bequem, gemdcfylfcl). e ber ^ampf* f wtber, prep. ace. s t> er 3n>eoi h an, bet), prep. dat. i 6be, t>er* lafjetu k tnnerfyalb, prep. gen. l yermtttelfl, prep, gen. m bte gorfcfyung, bte Unterfucfyung. c 5 34 Rules of Grammar. Part I. happy years, among their kinder 1 friends. With my heavier 13 complaints, and without your more powerful tears. For our more essential concerns, and through their slighter objections. (1) Mildest d , (2) most acid 6 , happiest, deepest, most holy, longest, noblest, brownest, most wealthy, bravest. Grayest, most faithful, most free, wildest, roughest, most red, strongest, thickest, tightest 1 , swiftest g , most stupid, most dumb, thinnest, stiffest h , most obscure 1 , bluntest, whitest, hottest, palest, sweetest, greatest, falsest, most active, most philosophical, most rebellious, most warlike, firmest k , most steady 1 , most virtu- ous, wisest, blackest, shortest. (3) The clearest river, the ripest fruit, the sweetest water. The cold of the severest winter, the heat of the most vehement fire. In the darkest (1) The superlative degree. Gr. 193 198. El. 28, 29. (2) Adjectives changing their vowels, and making the superlative degree, according to their different endings, either by ft, or eft. Gr. 194, 195. (3) The third form of the superlative degree. Gr. 195. 5. El. 28. 3. a gittig, b lajfig* c fct/road), d milbc* e fcfyarf. f jlvaff* s fchnell* h jfarr, stiff, motionless, by cold, or stupefaction. ' bltmpf, applied to sound. k feft. Sect. II. 2. Comparison of Adjectives. 35 night, with the most inconsiderate resolution. ( 1 ) In the wisest manner, through the most expe- ditious proceeding. (2) My swiftest dog, her prettiest cat, our most beautiful horse. Thou most cruel man ! Ye most hardened a criminals ! b The grief of my most unhappy friend. The glory of his most brilliant campaigns, and the consequences of his most vic- torious battles. Their most powerful preparations, and our most zealous wishes. By means of his bravest soldiers, together with his most experienced counsellors, against his most insignificant enemies. (3) * With his most melancholy foreboding, (1) In, here to be rendered by ailf, prep. ace. Gr. 369. 6. (2) The fourth form of the superlative. Gr. 197. The indefinite article is hardly ever found before the superlative degree, strictly so called, in German. For, though it does not unfrequently precede the superlative adverb most, in English, as, for example, a most cruel delay, a most severe winter ; in German, other superlative adverbs, such as fy5d)ft/ most highly, aitperf!, extremely, must be employed, as : em h&cfyft graufamer TCuffcfyub, em du^erjl jfrenger SBtnter, (3) Besides the instances remarked in the pre- ceding note, there are others, in which most is * setftocft, serfyartet, b t>er 23erbved)er, c unbebeutentu c 6 36 Rules of Grammar. Part I, after our most painful discourse. For his most unjust conduct against our most earnest represent- ation.* (1) Dearest friend ! Most beloved sister ! Most amiable child ! (2) He is a bravest; she is b most charming; it is c most agreeable. The sky was 4 most serene towards the evening ; the night was coldest about three o'clock 6 , the country f is most salubrious in the spring. (3) The largest 8 house of all ; the very richest man; the most beautiful girl of all; a most charming 11 comedy 1 . not, in German, to be rendered by the superlative degree ; but to be expressed by certain adverbs, viz. fyocfyff, in the highest degree, aitferff, extremely, ailfj erorbentltd), extraordinarily, and the like. The ex- amples above, between the stars, are of that description. (1) The second form of the superlative degree, as it occurs in the vocative case. Gr. 197. (2) The superlative degree, in the following ex- amples, assumes a particular shape. It is made to end in en, and the word am is put before it. See this amply explained in the Gr. 195. 5. It is briefly men- tioned in the Elements, 28. 3. (3) Gram. 197. 6. a er iff* b ffetft. c e tft. d roar, e urn etroa t>w Ufytf f t>a ant>, etne lanbltdbe egenb, aflergtof? t* 11 aUerrdd)ft, allerfcfyonjt, atterliebjf, * fcujifpid* Sect. II. 2. Comparison of Adjectives. 37 (1) The child is more mindful a of its duty, than the father. The man is more (2) inimical b to him, than the woman ; but I am most hostile to him. That is most wrong. His suspicion is better founded , than your confidence. He is more mindful d of his advantage than of his duty. I am e more incensed f against (3) the adviser than against the perpetrator. g They are more afraid' 1 than we. The beef is better done 1 than the mutton. (4) The boy is more lively than the girl ; the son more learned than the father; the servant k more conscientious, than the master 1 ! (5) His (1) Adjectives which do not admit the common mode of comparison. Gr. 198. Addit. Remark I. Recourse must be had to md;r and am metf!en, as stated in Remark II. p. 199. (2) Say : to him more inimical. Inimical, feint)* (3) Say : to the adviser, t>em SRatftgeber* (4) Certain adjectives may be said to admit the comparative degree in the first form only, because the sounds which they would produce in the other forms would not be agreeable to the ear. The superlative, however, is not liable to this objection. The preterite participles may be used in the same form of the super- lative. Gr. 199. (5) )a3 lucf* Gr. 391. 1. a dngeben!* b feint** c ciegrunbet* d dmjebenf* e id) bin* f gram* g tem Abater* h angfl"* J gar* * ber >tener. l ber err* 38 Rules of Grammar. Part L demeanour is more clownish % and his speeches more ridiculous. The most (1) learned man, and the most virtuous woman. The most irreproach- able 1 ' friend, and the most waggish companion. (2) The narrative of the child is more true than the assertion 4 of the man. The colour is more brown, than red; the taste is more sour, than bitter ; the climate is more damp, than cold. (3) The letter 6 is good, the speech is better, but the poem is best. The money of this man is much, the money of the other is more, and the money of the woman is most. Several persons f : the customs of several countries. The lecture is (4) earlier, but the sermon is earliest. The house is high, the church higher, but the steeple highest. (1) Learned, gelefytt, is properly a participle, from Ufyvcn, to teach. It may, without any scruple, be em- ployed in the third form of the superlative degree. (2) Gr. 199. II. (3) Adjectives, whose mode of comparison is irre- gular. Gr. 199. III. El. 29. 1. (4-) S5alt,wow; fyocfy, high; nafye, near. Gr. 200. * bdurifd), tofytfci) b untabel&aft* c fchalfbaft, fpaf&aft, d bit S3ehauptung* e t>er SSrief, f mehrere geute. Sect. II. 3. The Numerals. 39 The garden is near, the meadow nearer, but the field nearest. (1) The middle pillar, the exterior wall, the interior apartment. The superior part, the infe- rior situation, the posterior 1 building b . The middlemost among the trees, the uppermost of d the books, the hindermost 6 horse. The Supreme Being. The fairest, the dearest.* 3. The Numerals. (2) One dog, one cat, one sheep. Two horses three cows, six goats, ten pigs, eighteen lambs. Twenty hares, (3) a hundred birds, a thousand fishes. (4) Have you f got a stick? Yes, here is one. (1) Some adjectives have the appearance of com- paratives, though, in fact, they are not understood in the comparative degree. Gr. 200. IV. * The comparative and superlative degree may be taken substantively. Gr. 201. V. (2) Cardinal Numbers. Gr.201. El. 30. (3) The indefinite article is, in German, not put before the numbers hundred and thousand ; " which has been already observed, in a former note. (4-) Terminations added, under certain circum- a ba fitntere* b ebdube ; or, ba oberfie* d t>om e ba$ fyinterjle, f haben @ic ? 40 Rules of Grammar. Part I. Have you (1) a book? Here is one. Who has* got an inkstand ? I have b got one. One of the men, and one of the children. Where is the chair? There is (2) none here. Where is the water? There is (2) none here. Who has money? I have none. (3) The one and the other. Two brothers : the one tall, the other little. Two sisters : the one handsome, the other witty. TWQ children : the one strong, the other weak. Friends and foes. (4) The confirmation of two witnesses; the stances, to the first numeral : er to the nominative sin- gular of the masculine, and eS to the nominative and accusative singular of the neuter gender. Gr. 202. (1) To have is a verb of a transitive signification, and therefore requires the accusative case. Gr. 429. IV. (2) The negative adjective lettt, feme/ f em, stands, with regard to the additional endings, er in the nomi- native masculine, and e in the nominative and accusative neuter, upon the same ground as etn, etnc, etn. Gr. 203. (3) Gr. 204. t>er 2Cnbere/ the other, is, in German, frequently synonymous with ter 3weite, the second. Gr. 209. 4. (4) Gr.204.2. a rcer Sect. II. 3. The Numerals. 41 confession of three delinquents. ( 1 ) The presence of four Judges. Here are twenty people 3 : I gave it b to five or six; he spoke c with four. (2) A two, a three; two sixes, three nines. The hundred, the thousand. (3) First period, third division, second year. The fourth messenger, the fifth representation, and the tenth sentence* 1 . My eleventh month, and thy twelfth journey. His twentieth book, and their sixtieth chapter. (4) The 3745th number. (5) Ten and ten ; every five. Secondly, thirdly, in the fourth place 6 , in the fifth place f . (1) When of is to be expressed before any numeral, beyond three, as the declinable ending of the genitive ceases there, it must be rendered by toon. Gr. 205. below. But all the numerals admit the termination of the dative, which must be made use of, if that case is not marked by any substantive following. Gr. 205. (2) Gr. 208. 4-. 208. 5. (3) Ordinal Numbers, Gr. 207. El. 31. Refer next to Gr. 208. 2. (4) In compound numbers, the last only assumes the character of an ordinal. Gr. 209. 3. (5) Partitive and distinctive numerals. Gr. 210. I. and II. b id) gab e8. c er fprach* d ba Ur* theil. e wertenS, or um ttierten, f fimftenS, funften. 42 Rules of Grammar. Part I. (1) Two years and a half; four guineas and a half; ten yards and a half; twenty miles and a half; thirty hours and a half; a foot and a half. (2) Bread of two different sorts ; cheese of three different sorts ; soup of five different sorts. (3) Twofold, threefold, sixfold. Threefold gain ; a tenfold reward ; the sevenfold proportion ; a twenty-four-pound weight ; a five-cornered beam. (4) A fourth part, a tenth, three fifths, four ninths ; the half; the whole village a ; half of the street 1 '; a whole hour c , half an hour. 4. The Pronouns.* (5) Of me, of thee, of him, of her, of us, of you, of them. On my account, on thy account, (1) Diraidiative numbers. Gr. 210. III. (2) Variative numbers. Gr. 21 1. IV. (3) Multiplicative numbers. Gr. 212. V. (4) Fractional numbers. Gr. 212. VI. * The pronouns extend, in the Grammar, from p. 214. to 24-4. ; in the Elements, from p. 33. to 39. (5) Personal pronouns. Gr. 214 224. El. 33, 34. The genitive case of those pronouns is here made an object of attention, from Obs. 2. Gr. 216. a ba >orf* b bte (Strafe. c We tunbe. Sect. II. 4. The Pronouns. 43 on his account, on her account, on their account. He mocks a me; he laughs b at thee; have mercy upon him ; have mercy upon us; have mercy upon them. There are many of us ; there are few of them. (1) I wash d myself; thou cuttest e thyself; he tires f himself; she troubles 5 herself; we console 11 ourselves; you torment 1 yourselves; they praise k themselves ; they blame 1 one another. (2) I my- self, thou thyself, he himself, she herself: we our- selves, you yourselves, they themselves. The king himself, the queen herself, and the nation itself. He did not spare himself. (3) It is a dog, it is a cat, it is a rabbit. They (1) Reciprocal power of the personal pronouns. Gr. 222. 4. El. 34., 2. (2) Gr. 223. (3) The neuter pronoun e/ beginning a sentence, Avithout any regard to the number and gender of the subject nominative. Gr. 223. 5. It may be often considered as a substitute for the English there : as, There is a famine in the country, e ift Cine >tmger3* not!) im Sanbe* The words in Italics are those which are to be rendered by e3 a er fpottet, b er lacfyet. c erbarme btcfy. d id? wijcfye. e bu fcfyneibej!, f erermubet * fie beunruhigt* h wir troftem ! thrqudlet* k fie lobem } fie tabeln. 44 Rules of Grammar. Part I. are a birds ; they are hares. Is b it a fox, or is it a goose? Are they partridges? No, they are (1) snipes. (2) My garden, thy meadow, his land, her estates ; our hope, your wishes, their means. The book is mine, the pen is his, the letter is yours ; the coins are ours, the rewards are theirs. Whose d dog is that 6 ? It is mine. (3) Whose horse is that? it is his. Whose money has he (1) To give more force to this sentence, the word snipes, which is the object, should be placed in front, thus : snipes are they. Gr. 484. Rule II. Except. I. 476. 2. (2) Pronouns possessive. Gr. 224227. El. 34, 35. These pronouns agree with the substantives to which they belong, in gender, number, and case. Gr. 401.1. The exercises which follow, refer, in the first instance, to 225. 1. (3) The endings, et in the nominative of the mascu- line gender, and e in the nominative and accusative of the neuter gender, are to be made use of, in the next examples, for the words printed in Italics, in the same way as was done with the first numeral. See Exer- cises, p. 39. note 4. It is stated in the Grammar, p. 225. obs. 1., that those endings are to be employed when a distinction of the possessor is signified : and it is to be remarked, that this is done, when the sub- a ft'nb. b iff, iitcr, plur. n> e ffen. e ijl bag* Sect. II. 4. The Pronouns. 45 got a ? He has got b hers. (1) Whose paper? yours. Whose book? mine. Whose stick is this c ? It is (2) mine. Whose watch is this ? It is his. Whose book is this? It is ours. Whose horses are those d ? They are e theirs. (3) The assistance of (4) this and that friend; the prattle of this and that woman. From this and that circumstance. (5) This is an elephant, and that is a serpent. These are tigers, and those are leopards. (6) That boy, who came first/ stantive, to which the possessive pronoun belongs, is not expressed, but understood by reference. For when the substantive accompanies the pronoun, though a distinction of the possessor is implied, those termi- nations are not admitted. (1) Hers is the accusative case, governed by the transitive verb, er hat* Gr. 429. IV. (2) The definite article before the possessive pro- noun. Gr. 226. 3. El. 35. 2. (3) Pronouns demonstrative. Gr. 228233. El. 36, 37. These, like the possessives, must agree with their substantives, in gender, number, and case. Gr. 401. I. (4) Gr.229. 1. (5) Gr. 229. 2. and 232. 5. (6) Determinative Pronouns. Gr. 229. B. hat er ? b er feat* c ijl bjeS ? d finb ft'nb* f roelcber juerfl fam. 46 Rules of Grammar. Part I. That one (1) who followed us a . (2) The same subject b , and the (3) very same sentiments . (4) Of this [or, hereof], with that [or, therewith], in this [or, herein], on that [or, thereon]. (5) The man (6) who, the woman who, the thing which. The tree which, the flower which, the fruit d which. I (7) who, thou who, he who; (8) we who, you who, they who. To me who, (1) The suppletive word one is not made use of in German. Therefore, say, )iefer/ Welder un folgfe, making the gender of the pronouns agree with the substantive understood. Gr. 204. (2) Gr. 232. 6, 7, 8. (3) To give more expression to the notion of iden- tity, the adverb eben may be put before berfelfce. Gr. 231. at the bottom of the page. (4) Gr. 233. 10. (5) Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. Gr. 233. 241. El. 37 39. The relative pronouns agree with the substantive to which they belong, in gender and number. Gr. 401. I. (6) There is no difference between who and which in German. Gr. 234. 1. El. 38. 1. (7) 2Beld)Cr and )er : how to be used. Gr. 234. 1. El. 38. 1, 2. (8) It is said, in the Grammar, that, after the first and second personal prenouns, it is advisable to em- ploy V0eld)er, rather than ber. But modern writers rcelcfyer un3 folgte* b ber egenj!anb ber ebanfe, bte efmnung* d ba$ >bft Sect. II. 4. The Pronouns. 47 ( 1 ) with thee who, against me who, for thee who. From us who, besides you who, through us who, without you who. The tree (2) that flourishes 3 ; the fountain which flows b ; the field which smiled . (3) The poet who, the poetess who, the poem which. This proceeding which, and that re- sistance which. (4) He who (5) considers the ar- mostly prefer bte after the first person plural, ttnr, on account of the alliteration of n)tr and Welcfye, which would, at all events, be disagreeable to the ear. It is, therefore, better to say, ttrir t>te ttnr, than tt>tr Wdd)C See Gr. 235. note. (1) After the oblique cases (gen. dat. ace.) tt>eld)CV seems, in all instances, even after the first person plural, to be entitled to preference. In the Grammar (234. 1.), the pronoun @ie, they, is mentioned in con- nection with the second personal, although @te is the third person. However, this is no error ; for @te is there meant as the pronoun of address, representing the second person. Gr. 219. (2) The relative pronoun being in immediate con- tact with the verb, ttJelcfyer is to be preferred. Gr. 235. 2. (3) The definite article, or a demonstrative pro- noun, closely preceding the relative. Gr. 235. 3. (4) SBer, tt>a$ Gr. 237. 4. El. 38. 3. (5) The relative pronoun has the peculiarity of removing the verb to the end of that member of the sentence to which the relative belongs. See this a blufyet, b fltejj et* c Idcfyelte* 48 Rules of Grammar. Part I. guments attentively, is easily convinced a . What you have seen b , is not the whole store. That (1) which appears (2) to me to be the best. The book (3) I read (i. e. which (4) I read) c . The money you paid for me (which you for me paid) d . The picture he painted (which he painted) (5) last year. I have something to tell you. (6) Who is in the room? 6 Who has got f it? What says he*? Which man is here? Which explained in the Chapter on the arrangement of words. Gr.490. (1 ). The words above must be thus arranged : He who the arguments attentively considers. Considers, uberlegt* (1) That which, tt>a$>. (2) Say : to me the best to be appears. To be appears, ju fet)n fcfyeint* (3) Relative pronouns can, in German, never be omitted where there exists a relative idea. The rela- tive must always be expcessed, though, in English, it is frequently only understood. Gr. 239. 5. (4) Which, tt>eld)e, the neuter gender, agreeing with the antecedent substantive, t>a 33ud). (5) The collocation of the words must be this : which he last year painted ; the relative forcing the verb to the end, according to Gr. 490. 1. (6) Interrogatives. Gr. 239. 6. El. 38. 3. a nrirb letd)t uberjeugt* b n?a <3ie gefefyen ftaben. c id) lag* d weld)e @te fur mid) bejafylten. e t>a Simmer, t>ie tube* f tyat* g fagt er? Sect. II. 4. The Pronouns. 49 dissertation have you read a ? Which poem pleases" you most c ? ( 1 ) What a sportsman ! What account [i. e. what sort of account] have you received" 1 ? what [a] prattle that is ! (2) What nonsense ! What motives ! What excuses ! (3) Whereof, wherewith, whereto, whereby, wherefore. (4) One may see 6 . A person might think f . People often talk g a great deal h , without sufficient foundation'. People admire k his eloquence, but disapprove 1 his principles. One is always melan- choly in that situation, and nothing consoles'" (1) 2Ba fur ettu Gr. 239. 7. El. 38. 3. (2) In the three following examples, the indefinite article, between n?a6 and fur, is to be omitted. Gr. 239. (3) The relative adverb n)0, joined with preposi- tions. Gr. 240. 8. (4) Miscellaneous pronouns. Gr.241 244. El. 39- man, Gr. 241. 2. El. 39. * fyaben (5ie gelefen? b gefatlt Sfynen? c am meiften, am bejfen* d fyaben @te erfyalten ? c r'ann feftem f fonnte benfen* B rebet. h wief* j te'r k bewunbert, > mi^biaigt. m trftflet* 50 Rules of Grammar. Part I. one (1). What is given to (2) one, one (3) loses unwillingly. Let that alone. Let not this be again 3 taken away b . (4) Some one, or no one. Every one's wish. He tells c it to no one. (5) The owner himself is there. The mother herself saw d it. The book itself is no more in existence 6 . (6) I and nine others ; my brother and three besides ; his sister with five more. ( 1 ) This must be the accusative case, after the transitive verb troftet ; and when, to the indefinite personal, a dative or an accusative is wanted, these cases are borrowed from the masculine gender of the indefinite article. The dative etnem, the accusative etneru Gr. 24-2. (2) Dative, etnem. The sentence must be thus placed : What to somebody given is, loses one unwil- lingly. In the first member, the verb goes to the end, on account of the relative (Gr. 490. (1).); and the second being the subsequent member, the subject man, one, must be put after the verb (Gr. 480. 12.). Given is, gegeben ifl ; loses one, tterliert man* (3) One is here the nominative, man* Gr. 241. 2. (4) Semanb, jebermann, niemanb* Gr. 242. 3. (5) <5elber, felbtf. Gr. 243. 4. The word felbf! has been noticed in the reciprocal pronouns. (6) Peculiar use of felbft, in combination with nu- merals. Gr. 243. a nneber* b roenehmem c er at* d a. Sect, III. 1. Auxiliary Verbs. 51 SECTION III. ON THE VERBS.* 1 . Auxiliary Verbs, f (1) Thou hast, he had, we have had, you had had, they (2) will have. Have you ? have they ? had you? had they? have they had? will they have? * In the Grammar, Chap. IV. from p. 245 336. El. 39 99. The exercises of this section will be copious. The necessity of learning the verbs perfectly and correctly, by heart, must not be overlooked : the examples, here given, will only point out and illustrate some particular difficulties. The subjunctive mood, the right use of which requires a nice discrimination, will not be adverted to in this part of our grammatical practice, but be duly considered in another place. f Gr. 245 271. El. 39 54. (1) First auxiliary, haben, to have. Gr.246 251. El. 3944. (2) The future tense is made by the assistance of the third auxiliary, tt>erbcn Gr. 249. above. In English, two auxiliaries, shall and will, are used for that tense ; their use is determined by the cir- cumstances attending the future time. In some posi- D 2 52 Rules of Grammar. Part I. (1) Thou wast (2), and ye were. I have been, and they had been. Are you ? are they ? were they? Have they been? will they be? We shall have been, and they would be, or would have been. Let him be my enemy, but be thou my friend. Be (ye 3) constant and faithful : let us (4) be com- passionate. (5) I became, thou becamest, he tions, those two verbs, shall and will, coincide with the German verbs, foden and tt)0Uen; and the learner may, therefore, be tempted to make use of these generally, instead of the true auxiliary, tt>ett>Cl1 : to guard against which mistake, it will be sufficient to recommend a careful perusal of the explanation given concerning the verbs YDOttett and foUen, in the Gram- mar, p. 265 268. (1) Second Auxiliary, fepn, to be. Gr. 252 256. El. 4448. (2) The second person singular, preterimperfect, may either be roarefl, or warfl; and the second person plural, either roaret, or roart : but fttarej}, IDdtet, are to be preferred. (3) The pronouns which are here, as well as in the Grammar, put in parenthesis, aud of which this is one, are commonly omitted. (4) Concerning the first person plural, in the im- perative mood, see Gr. 251. note. (5) It is recommended, by some Grammarians, as more classical, to employ, in the first and third persons singular, n>art> for wurfce : in the second, WUrbejt, fo Sect. III. I. Auxiliary Verls. 53 became, we became. He is become. They are be- come. He will become. They will become (1). Thou mayest (2) laugh, it vexes a me not; you may weep, it moves b me not. It might snow, it might freeze ; he might come, they might go. May the son be (3) a comfort to his father ! May tt>arbft ; and to form the plural entirely from Wltrbe, ttnr ttwrben, thr wurbet, fie rourben. I have, in the first two editions, but not in the third and fourth editions, of the Grammar, tacitly countenanced this opinion, by placing id) ttJlirbe, bu Warbft, er ttWrbe, in parenthesis, to show that those terms were not so much to be encouraged as their companions, id? roarb, bit wurbej!, er tt>arb But, upon reflection, I am induced to think that it would be best to get rid of such an anomaly, and to conjugate the tense in question uniformly, nPUfbC, nwrbefl, nwtbe, rourben, nwrbet, rourben. (1) Here follow exercises on the verbs, mogett, wollen, follen, fcmnen, burfen, (affen, mitJTen* The Grammar affords, by the observations subjoined to the auxiliary verbs, from p,263 271., an opportunity, in this place, of exemplifying the signification and peculiar usage of those verbs. (2) 9ft6gem See Gr. 264. (3) The infinitive at the end. Gr. 495. IV. Say, May the son to his father a comfort be. a frnnlt, b rufyrt* D 3 54 Rules of Grammar. Part I. this report be false ! I should like to (1) read (2) the letter. Who is (3) able to describe the misery ! Do you like (4) strawberries ? (5) Will you go (6) with me? I will stay (6) at home. (7) He shall stay (6) against his will. We are (8) to sit down. The river is (9) said to be overflowed*. He (10) can write, but he will not. We may (11) depend upon him b . He (12) (1) 3d) mod)te roohl, or (A) m6d)te germ SBohl fre- quently accompanies the verb mocfyte, in this signifi- cation. (2) Say: the letter to read; infinitive at the end. Gr. 495. IV. (3) Sftag. Say: the misery to describe; and see the preceding note. (4) Sfftogen @ie? This, however, can hardly be admitted, as good and classical language. Better : efien @te gern (Srbbeeren ? (5) SBotten. Gr. 265. (6) Infinitive last. Gr. 495. IV. At home must be repeated in German. (7) @otten Gr. 265. (8) SBtr follem (9) oil, (10) .ft&nnem Gr. 268. (11) SOBtr fonnem (12) This signification cannot be considered as auegetreten fe^m b un6 aitf ihn Sect. III. 1. Auxiliary Verbs. 55 knows French. You may (1) knock, but he (2) must not (3) accompany you. It (4) might per- haps not be (3) easy. (5) We must exert our- selves a . I must go away. Let (6) him talk, and let us consider. (7) He is laughing b . I was reckoning ; they have been speaking together d . (8) I praise 6 the action; and do you blame it f ? Did he say 5 any thing h about it 1 ? good and classical. Gr. 268. 3. It becomes correct by adding fpred&eru (1) @ie mogen flopfen* (2) (Sr barf* >urferu Gr. 269. (3) The infinitive last. Gr. 495. IV. (4) @$ bitrfte* (5) fjRfcfFetu Gr. 270. (6) gag. Verb, laffem Gr. 270. (7) The auxiliary verb to be, forming, in English, together with the participle, the definite, or determined, time. Gr. 271. 2. (8) The verb to do, joined, in English, with the infinitive of some other verb, marking the present, and past imperfect time, or serving to ask questions, Gr. 271. 3. a un anftrengeru b er lad)t c id) recfynete* d fie fjaben mit etnanber gefprocfyem e id? lobe* f fabeln a * bauoru D 4 56 Rules of Grammar. Part I. 2. Regular Verbs* (1) To learn; we learn, they learn. To wait; we wait, they wait. (2) I taught, he taught; I painted, he painted. We trembled, they trembled; we wept, they wept. (3) I have praised, he has blamed, we have heard, you have complained, they have judged. (4) The duke has governed 3 ; the army has marched b ; the provinces have rebelled ; the chiefs d have protested 6 . This child has spelt f ; we have walked 5 , the clerk has copied h . (5) Thou * Gr. 272285. El. 5464-. The exercises will principally turn upon the general rules. Gr. 273 275. (1) The first and third persons plural, present tense, are always like the infinitive. Gr. 273. II. (2) Of the preterimperfect, the first and third per- sons singular are alike. Gr. 273. IL ; and also the first and third persons plural. (3) Gr. 273. II I. (4) Verbs in ieretl, or irett, do not take the prefix gc in the preterite participle. Gr. 273. III. (5) Gr. 274. V. a recjteren* b marfcfeirem c rebelltren. d ber #n* fuhrer. e protej?tren. f bucfyftabtren, & fyaljteren. h coptren (abfchreiben)* Sect. HI. 2. Regular Verbs. 57 lovest, he loves, you love. I did love, thou didst love. Thou (1) fishes t, thou jes test % thou wipes t b ' thou demandest c , thou rustiest d ; thou art of use 6 ' thou squirtest f ; thou art puffed upS; thou bid- dest defiance 11 . (2) To obscure 1 ; to sparkle k ; to glitter 1 ; to dash in pieces" 1 . I shake"; he trembles ; they ring the bell p . We surrounded* 1 the town, and you outflanked 1 " the enemy. (1) In the second persons of the verbs which next follow, it would be wrong to omit the e ; because a harsh and difficult sound would be produced by that omission. It must, therefore, be : flfcfyejf, nrifcfeej!, trofcejf, not ftftyft, foafft, wifcbft, trofejl* (2) Gr. 274. VI. a fpafjen, fcfyerjem b roifcfyen, to wipe. betfcben, to demand. d raitfdjen, to rustle. e nitfcett, to be of use. f fprifeen* jiro^en, to be puffed up. h tro^en, to bid defiance. } oerbunfeln. k funfeln. l fd)tm* mcrn* m jerfcfymettern. n fc^utteln, to shake. jit* tern* P fUngeln, to ring the bell, i umjtngelru 1 iiberflitgeln, to outflank. D 5 58 Rules of Grammar. Part I. 3. Irregular Verbs* (1) To ride; I ride; I rode; ride thou; ridden. To remain ; I remain ; I remained ; remain thou ; remained (pret. part.). To command; I command, thou commandest, he commands; I commanded; command thou, let him command. To speak; I speak, thou speakest, he speaks ; I spoke ; speak thou, let him speak. To die; I die, thou diest, he dies ; he died ; die thou, let him die. To hit ; I hit, thou hittest, he hits ; I did hit ; hit thou, let him hit. To tread ; I tread, thou treadest, he treads ; I trod ; tread thou, let him tread. (2) We command, ye command, they com- * Gr. 286302. El. 6589. It is to be under- stood, that only the rules and observations on the irregular verbs are to be illustrated by the exer- cises. (1) Parts which are chiefly irregular. El. p. 65. Rule 1.; Gr. 286. and 301. I. All the verbs here used are to be found in the list of Irregulars, in the Grammar and the Elements. (2) The first person plural of the present tense is always like the infinitive, and the remaining persons are thence formed regularly. The third person sin- Sect. III. 3. Irregular Verbs. 59 mand. I spoke, thou spokest, he spoke, we spoke, ye spoke, they spoke. We break, ye break, they break. I thought, thou though test, he thought, we thought. We fall, ye fall, they fall. I gave, thou gavest, he gave, they gave. (1) If I possessed, if thou movedst, if he fell, if we thought, if you dared, if they (2) drove. If they (3) knew his face ; if he commanded his ser- vants ; if they died without children. gular of the preterimperfect is like the first. El. 65. Rules 2 and 3. Gr. 301. 1. (1) The subjunctive mood of the preterimperfect. Gr. 301. 2. El. 65. 4. (2) To drive, fasten, irreg. Gr. 289. El. 70. (3) Verbs which have, in the preterimperfect sub- junctive, a vowel or a diphthong not corresponding with the vowel of the indicative. Gr. 301. 2. To know, fennett, irreg. Gr. 292. El. 74. The conjunction if, tt)emt, forces the verb to the end. Say : if they his face knew ; Gr. 492. 3. but better : were to them his face known; SSare ifynen fetn eficbf befannt* ' D 6 Rules of Grammar. Part I- 4. Verbs Neuter.* (1) The Romans had quite (2) degenerated, when (3) they submitted to the sway a of one master. He had fallen asleep b , and his cares had disappeared. The flower has faded, but the plant has increased. He has died without (4) leaving any heir. We should have (5) got * Gr. 303 307. (1) Gr.304. I. (2) 2fu3geartet, the preterite participle of a verb compound separable, auarten* (3) )a, when, one of the conjunctions which carry the verb to the end of the sentence. Gr. 492. (3). Say : when they themselves to the sway of one master submitted. But the conjunction alg is preferable here, because it relates only to time, whilst t>a, since, adds a reason or cause to the idea of time. (4) jDfyne, without, is, in German, followed by the infinitive, not by the participle. Gr.419. 4. And the infinitive is carried to the end of the sentence. Gr. 495. IV. Therefore, the words above must be thus expressed in German, without any heir to leave. (5) To get into, fyinetn geratbeit. See the list of ir- regular verbs. The'preterite participle having its place, t>te ewalt b dnfcfylafen, to fall asleep. Sect. III. 4. Verbs Neuter. 61 into difficulties' 1 , (1) if our patron b had not re- covered . (-2) He has walked from Oxford to London; and I have rode forty miles, in half (3) a day. They have swum from Windsor to d Richmond. The French army has marched for d the Pyrenees. (3) The ambassador was not (5) arrived, (6) when I left the town; and he had not (7) passed in a sentence, near the end, and the infinitive still more so, the words are here to be thus arranged : we should into difficulties got been. Concerning the collocation of the preterite participle, see Gr. 498, ///.; and that of the infinitive, 495. IV. (1) If causes the verb to go to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say, therefore, if our patron not recovered had. (2) Gr. 304. II. '(4) Local particles, in compound verbs neuter. Gr. 304. II. (3) Say : in a half day, according to Gr. 393. 4. (5) To arrive, anfommen, verb compound separa- ble ; pret. part, angef ommen. (6) When, ba or al3, makes the verb go to the end. Say : when I the town left. Gr. 492. (3). (7) To pass through, bltrdhfommen, verb compound separable : preterite participle, bimfygef Ottimem But a bte SBerkgenfcdt b ber onner, SSefcfyttfcer, genefen. d nach, prep. dat. 62 Rules of Grammar. Part I. through, two hours (1) ago. When (2) he (3) dis- embarked from the ship, he (4) found (5) that his retinue had (6) departed. (7) They have been (8) jumping, for the sake as burcfyfommen also means, to get out of difficulties, it is better to use buvcfytdfett/ sep. reg. (1) SSor jroet) tunbetu Gr. 372. El. 104. (2) 2Cl, when, brings the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (3) To get out of, fhtgen, irreg. Gr. 297. El. 84. To be construed with the preposition atU>, and the dative. (Stetgen signifies to mount, to ascend; and with certain particles, also to descend ; e. gr. flbffetQCtt, auSfletgen, to alight, to disembark. (4) This is the subsequent member of the sentence, and you must say : found he. Gr. 480. 12. (5) >a, that, causes the verb to go to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (6) The preterite participle has its place near the end. Gr.498. III.; but when a verb is by some con- junction forced to the end, the preterite participle is before it. Here : that his retinue departed was, Gr. 499. (7) Motion, considered as mere action. Gr. 305. middle. (8) Say: they have, for the sake of exercise, jumped. Been jumping is rendered in German, by the simple preterite participle, tfwun$tn, jumped. Gr, 271. 2. This participle is.put towards the end. Gr. 498. ///. Sect. III. 4. Verbs Neuter. 63 of (1) exercise 3 : but I should (2) have rode (3) to attain that object b . They have rode (4) slowly, while (5) weiiave walked fast. After (6) he had fallen, he (7) said, that (8) he would have followed me, if I had come near him c . The enemy had yielded d , and had (9) left the field, (1) For the sake of, fyalbem Gr. 356. Say : for the sake of the exercise. (2) Say : rode have. The infinitive, after the pre- terite participle. Gr. 499. middle. (3) When design, or purpose, is implied, the par- ticle illtt is put before the infinitive, with ju Gr. 418.2. The infinitive at the end. Gr. 495. IV.: for (um) that object to attain. (4) Gr. 305. Participle last. Say : They have slow rode. (5) While, ttJafyrettb baf, puts the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say: while we fast walked have ; and add ju ltf? e, on foot, to denote walking. (6) Gr. 306. III. After nacfybem, verb last. Gr. 492. (3). Whe he fallen was. (7) Subsequent member. Gr. 480. 12. (8) That, bag, verb last, Gr. 492. (3), and 499. (9) And had the field left. a bte S3ewegung, b ber Swetf* c wenn tdt) mid? iftm genafyet fydtte. d rodcfyen. 4 Rules of Grammar. Part L (1) Some a accident b would have happened c to us, (2) if we had remained. This might d not have come to pass 6 , (3) if the first enterprise had suc- ceeded f . We have stood here a long time, but the man has not got (4) up. (5) We have persevered in (6) our design 8 . I had met him twice; but he (7) would have pro- ceeded in a different manner, (8) if my friends had stopped at that inn, before the other people had landed. (1) Gr. 306. IV Say : Some accident would to us met been. (2) If we remained had. (3) If the first enterprise succeeded had. (4) Got up, aufgefianberu Verb compound sepa- rable, aufjlefyem (5) Gr. 306. V. (6) In, here to be rendered bet, prep. dat. (7 ) He would upon an other manner proceeded been. To proceed, tterfafytttU (8) If my friends at that inn stopped had,, before the other people landed were. To stop, einf efyren. Before, ebe, brings the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). eitu b ber 3ufatt e bege^nen* d rourbe nicht* e gefdjetyen. f gelingen, t>a$ SBorfyaben, Sect. III. 5. Reflective Verbs. 65 5. Reflective Verbs* I rejoice a , (1) that my friend has abstained 6 , from the abuse of (2) influence. He considered , and then determined* 1 to (3) resign his pretensions. He had intimated 6 that (4) his people would put up with f a small s allowance (5) of meat h , but that * Gr. 307. El. 90. (1) Say: that my friend from the abuse of in- fluence abstained has. That, baf?, carries the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (2) Of the influence, according to Gr. 400. 1 (3) His pretensions to resign. Infinitive near the end. Gr. 495. IV. To resign, fid) begeben, governs the genitive case. Gr. 424. 4. (4) That his people with a small allowance of meat put up would. (5) After words denoting quantity, the substantive that follows remains in the nominative case, though the preposition fcon may also be employed. Gr. 158. 394. 451. Compare Exercises, p. 14. note 3. a fid) freuen/ to rejoice. > fid) entfyalten, to abstain. c fid) bebenfen, to consider. * fid) entfd)ltef?en, to de- termine. e rtufern. f fid) behelfen, to put up with. sber Sfccil, ber Ent&ctl, tic Sutyctfong* h ba 66 Rules of Grammar. Part I. they would (1) resist every attempt to diminish the quantity 1 of bread. (2) Imagine not that I should claim (2) this title, if I had not been (2) confident of maintaining it. 6. Compound Verbs Separable* (3) Return thou home b , and come again. Buy ye in c , and agree d , how (4) you will sell it. (1) To resist, fid) ttriberfe^en, governs the dative. Gr. 428. middle. (2) @id) einbilben, to imagine ; fid) anmafkn, to claim, to pretend to, and also fid) Qetrauen, to be con- fident, take the reciprocal pronoun in the dative case. Gr. 427. middle. Therefore btr, not bid)/ is to be joined with einbilben ; and mir, not mid)/ with anma^en, and getraum (StnbUben and anmapen are verbs compound separable, concerning which, see Gr. 319, 320, 321. * Gr. 319321. El. 9598. (3) Separation in the imperative mood. Gr. 319. 1. El. 95. 1. (4) The particle how throws the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). The infinitive has its station likewise towards the end. Gr. 495. IV. Say, there- fore, how you it sell will. Will, to be expressed by WOtteiu Gr. 265. a bie portion* b fyeimfefyren, to return home. 6 dnfaufen* d iiberetnfommetu Sect. HI. 6. Compound Verbs Separable. 67 (1) I depart, and thou arrivest; he ceases, and we begin ; he continued, and they stood by a ; you re- turned, and they went out b . (2) He attempted to leap down c , and to run off d ; it was my duty to keep him (3) back e . I began to admonish (4) him, but he begged me to let him (5) out. (6) I shall stay away f , and he will go thither 5 . (7) We have (1) Separation in the indicative mood. Gr. 319. I. 2. El. 95. I. (2) Separation in the infinitive, by the preposition JU Gr. 320. I. 3. El. 95. I. On what occasions that preposition must accompany the infinitive is stated Gr. 418. B. (3) Say : him back to keep. (4) Say : him to admonish. (5) Say : him out to let. To let out, hinauSlaffem (6) This is the future tense, which is composed with the infinitive of the verb, and the auxiliary roerben. In the future, consequently, no separation takes place, as the infinitive can only suffer it by means of the particle ju, which particle is not em- ployed in the composition of the future. (7) These are tenses, composed with the preterite participle, in which the separation is made by the syllable ge* Gr. 320. 1. 4. a babeiftefyen, to stand by. fprincjen, herimterfprwgeru d weglaufe e jurucf fyaltem f roegbleibetu 68 Rules of Grammar. Part 1. supposed % but they have pretended 15 . He fol- lowed after , but his friend was gone before d . ( 1 ) Now the musick ceases, and the play 6 begins. With sincere satisfaction^ the man accepted the proposal. (2) Bring hither pen, ink, and paper. You took (3) the book this morning with you. He communicated to me yesterday the resolution of the council, and I referred 5 the matter to my bro- ther and two other men, who (4) were my friends. (1) Where is the particle separated to be put? Gr. 320. II. The first two examples show that it is to be placed after the subject nominative, when this happens to have its situation after the verb : and the subject no- minative assumes that situation, whenever the sentence begins with an adverb, such as now; or with a prepo- sition and its case, as with sincere satisfaction; or with certain conjunctions ; or with the objective case. Gr. 476484. See especially 4-79. 8, 9, 10. (2) The particle separated is placed after the words governed by the verb. Gr. 320. II. 2. El. 95. II. To bring (hither), fyerbrmgem (3) To take with one, mttnefymen* (4) Say: who my friends were. The relative pronoun moves the verb to the end. Gr. 490. (1). But the separated particle may have, and commonly n, uorangefyen* e ba @d?aufptel, f btc 3ufriebenf)ettf Sect. III. 6. Compound Verbs Separable. 6d The soldier, who (1) returns from the field, without his weapons, excites the suspicion (2) of cowardice. He (3) who assists an unfortunate (4) person, prepares for himself great happiness. (5) If he continues 3 this reprehensible conduct, he (6) forfeits b the name of a good c man. has, its place after the relative member, and quite at the end of the sentence. (1) The relative pronoun, as has been observed in the last note, carries the verb to the end ; conse- quently, the sentence will run thus : who from the field, without his weapons, returns ; and the verb compound separable jurucffefytt, returns, will come last, in which situation it undergoes no separation. Gr. 319. 7. 2. (2) Of, om Gr. 397. 1. (3) He who, wer* Gr. 237. 4. As a relative, Veer sends the verb to the end ; and the words must follow in this manner : He who an unfortunate person assists. (4) Person, ber SSftettfrf) ; here, the general term for a human being. (5) If, wenn/ one of the conjunctions which force the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (6) Subsequent member. Gr. 480. 12. fortfefeem b aerwirfem 70 Rules of Grammar. Part I. 7. Compound Verbs Inseparable.* I have proved ( 1 ) the contrary ; and we should (2) dishonour our friends, (3) if we did not dis- suade them from this enterprise. Their enemies had (4) deceived them ; but the pernicious designs* * Gr. 321, 322. El. 98. Little will be said about these verbs. The examples given will refer to the preterite participle, according to the Rule Gr. 322. (1) The preterite participle has its place towards the end. Gr. 488. IV. Say here: I have the con- trary proved. (2) Say : We should our friends dishonour. We should dishonour, is the first future conditional, con- sisting of the auxiliary VDurbert, and the infinitive ; tt)ir ttMtberu The infinitive mood is stationed towards the end. Gr.495. IV. (3) The conjunction if brings the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say: if we to them this enterprise not dissuaded. For did dissuade, say dissuaded, accord- ing to Gr. 271. 3.; the auxiliary do, did, having no existence in the German language. SBtbertfltfyen, to dissuade, is construed with the dative case of the person and the accusative of the thing. Gr. 427. middle. (4) Say : had them deceived. Preterite participle at the end. Gr. 498. IV. ber Sect. J II. 7. Compound Verls Inseparable. 71 of those culpable men have (1) been overthrown* by timely reflection 15 . (2) They have disap- proved the scheme, and said (3) that the man had abused their authority. This proceeding cannot be (4) misinterpreted d . 8. Verbs Compound Separable and Insepar- able* The general rode (5) through the lines 6 of the (1) Say : are through timely reflection overthroivn (2) Certain verbs, in -the list of inseparable com- pounds, receive the augment ge in the preterite par- ticiple. Gr. 322. Rule. Say : They have the scheme disapproved ; the participle being placed at the end, according to Gr. 498. IV. (3) )a, that, carries the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say : that the man their authority abused had. (4) Say : cannot misinterpreted become. * Gr. 323 325. El. 99. (5) ^ItVCfyretten, to ride through, in a transitive sig- jerftoren, aerefteltu b ba 9tad)benfem biUigen, a miffteuten, e tie lieber 72 Rules of Grammar. Part L army. The ambassador has (1) passed through. The enemy has surrounded the city ; and many Tiification ; and, therefore, inseparable. Gr. 324-. It appears, that the rule given in the Grammar, for the use of those compounds, is applicable when the first, or original, signification of the component particle pre- vails. When that signification is altered, the verbs, which were inseparable, become separable. For ex- ample, bltrd)bred)en, to break in pieces, is separable, though its meaning is transitive ; and the reason is, because the original signification of bttrd) is departed from. Thus it is in many verbs composed with unt, as limffofen/ to knock down ; Ulttwerfen, to overturn ; umfiuvjen, to overthrow ; umbrefyen, to turn about, to twist about ; Utttfefyten, to turn about, to return ; um- brtncien, to kill. The primary and genuine significa- tion of the particle urn is, that it denotes circular motion, or circular position ; but that signification is not adhered to in the examples just adduced. In most of those verbs, the idea of turning one side into the position of the other, the idea of subversion and change, appears to prevail ; in the verb itmbrtngett, to kill, the third signification of the preposition um (see Gr. 364. EL 102.) predominates. Refer to Gr. 324. (l) To pass through, burdjfommen, burcfyreifen, both neuter, consequently separable, and joined with the auxiliary fetytt, to be. See Exercises, Sect. III. 4. 7. and Gr. 324. I. Sect. III. 8. Compound Ferbs, Sep. and Insep. 73 soldiers have (1) perished. They considered 3 the offer, and deserted 6 to the enemy. He undertook the task c of (2) saving the ship ; but it went down d , (3) before he left the harbour. This design, (4) therefore, remained (5) unexecuted. (1) To perish, umfommen, separable, as being a verb neuter. To be construed with the auxiliary e^n, to be. Gr. 324. 1., and Exercises, Sect. III. 4. (2) Say : to save; the infinitive with ju. Gr. 418. B.I. (3) fye, before, removes the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (4) The conjunctions, alfo, bafyer, therefore, like adverbs, cannot well be placed between the subject and the verb. Gr. 505. ///. The verb is, in this sentence, last word. (5) To remain undone or unexecuted is untetbletbctt, which, though a verb neuter, is, nevertheless, inse- parable. This is to be ascribed to a change in the original signification of the component particle. * uberlcgem b ubergefyem c t>a efcfyaft, baS 2Ber!, untergefyen. 74 Rules of Grammar. Part I, 9. Verbs Doubly Compounded.* My brother has (1) entrusted to me the ad- ministration of his affairs. (2) Englishmen are (3) educated in the principles of a free constitu- tion a . We have abhorred the wicked. 10. Verbs Compounded with 2?ouns.-\- The jury acquitted the prisoner (4) of this ac- cusation ; but their indulgence did (5) not equal the favour of the judge. The others were condemned, and the sentence soon after executed. Have you (6) breakfasted? (7) Have you filled the glass? Have you poured the water into the bottle h ? I have not completed the business . * Gr. 325. D. (1) Preterite participle last. Gr. 488. IV. To entrust, anttertrauetu (2) >ie (gngldnber. Gr. 391. 1. (3) To educate, auferjiel)en* To abhor, tterabfcfyeuen, f Gr. 325. E. (4) Of, worn (5) Say : equalled not, and see Gr. 271. 3. (6) See the observation on the pronouns of address. Gr. 217. 3. (7) See Gr. Part I. Chap. IV. Sect 7. Rule E. * b tie glafcfye* c *>a efcfydft. Sect. IF. I. Present Participle. 75 SECTION IV. ON THE PARTICIPLE.* 1. The Present Participle. -^ (1) Burning fire, the flourishing season, a re- freshing rain. ('2) He was laughing, while I was crying. They are amusing themselves with (3) play- ing. (4) The sounds are charming*; the sight is * Gr. 337 347. f Gr. 337 344. (1) The present participle, used in the adjective forms. Gr. 337339. (2) The present participle cannot be joined with the auxiliary getjtt, to be, for the purpose of forming what is called the definite, or determined, time. Gr. 338. middle. See also 271. 2. (3) The participle is here employed substantively, for which, in German, is used the infinitive. Gr. 343, 344. at the top, and 459. at the top. (4) When a present participle has, by long usage, * bcjaubcrnb* E 2 76 Rules of Grammar. Parti. captivating*. The circumstances are pressing 11 ; the taxes are oppressive . This beverage is cooling d ; the other is heating 6 . (1) Nothing is more enter- taining^ than the conversation 6 of rational and virtuous friends. The eloquence of one man may (2) be more fluent h than (3) that of another. The most oppressive burden is the society of a stupid 1 talker k . (4) I saw her who was waiting, been entirely invested with the character of an adjec- tive, it will then bear being joined with the auxi- liary (geptt, to be. Gr. 338. at the bottom of the page. (1) The degrees of comparison, applied to the pre- sent participle. Gr. 339. (2) May, fann* See f ontten, Gr. 268. Say : may more fluent than the eloquence of another be ; the infinitive last. Gr. 498. IV. (3) The demonstrative pronoun, that, before a geni- tive case, is usual in English, but not so much so in German, where the substantive is often repeated, un- less a synonymous term can be substituted. Gr. 405. 6. Say, therefore: than the eloquence of another. (4) Gr. 339. at the bottom of the page. * enkucfenb, b bringenb* c brucFenb, d lublenb, e erfyikenb* f unterfyaltenb, bie Unterrebung* h fltef* fenb ! albertu k ber cfywafcer. Sect. IV. 1. Present Participle. 77 and heard her also who was singing : he who is running. (1) Thinking 1 that (2) you would come this evening 13 , I staid at home. Not (3) having heard the reason of this alarm , I doubted, whether (4) I should ascribe it to an accident, or to the violent (1) The present participle, constituting a member of a sentence ; which construction is not admitted in German. Gr. 339. Say either: / thought and staid at home ; or, as I thought, because I thought 1 staid at home. If the latter mode be adopted, the words, I staid at home, form the subsequent mem- ber; concerning which, see Gr. 480. 12.: and as, bfl, or because, roetl, will make the verb go to the end. See Gr. 492. (3). (2) That carries the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say : that you this evening come would. (3) Say either: I had not heard and doubted; or, as, ba, or, because, rcetl, / had not heard. See the last note but one. (4) Whether, ob/ forces the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Should ascribe becomes ascribe should, and is placed quite last, after a certain man. Should, to be expressed by foEte. Gr. 268. a gtaubem b biefen 2benb, c bte Unrufye, ber gdrm* E 3 78 Rules of Grammar. Part /. proceedings of a certain man. He would not go a step farther, being (1) convinced that (2) his compliance* would occasion danger. He spoke it (3) sighing, but the other answered laughing. The precious remains of those works were seized by the (4) all-devouring flames. Such comfortable (5) words were not lost upon (6) me. (7) An action to be praised, an opinion to be despised. (8) The reading of a novel is not, in (1) Say: because, or as, he convinced was; see Gr. 492. (3). (2) That, the verb last ; the infinitive next before it. Gr. 492. (3). Say : that his compliance danger occasion would. (3) The present participle adverbially. Gr. 338. (4) The present participle may govern a case. Gr. 342. (5) Say : comfort bringing, trojtbrtngenb* (6) Upon, an, prep. dat. Gr. 367. El. 102. (7) Gr. 343. To answer the Latin participle in dus. (8) The infinitive used substantively, instead of the English participle. Gr. 344. at the top. Compare 459. at the top. Sect. IV. 2. The Preterite Participle. 79 (1) itself, to (2) be blamed a ; but the sacrificing 11 of all other pursuits , on account of that trifling d amusement, is greatly to (2) be censured 6 . 2. The Preterite Participle* (3) The king has reigned more than forty- eight years. The attorney has protested 1 against our just claim. (4) Detested man ! abandoned 8 creature 1 * ! (1) In itself, an ft'ci), or, an fid) felbfh (2) Say : to blame, to censure, and see Gr. 343. * Gr. 34434,7. (3) The preterite participle of words in iren/ or ieren* Gr. 344. 273. III. This participle, as has been several times noticed, has its place always at the end of the sentence. Gr. 488. IV. Therefore, say : The king has more than forty-eight yean reigned. (4) The preterite participle, in the forms of the adjective. Gr. 344, 345, 346. a tabeln, wewerfen* b aufopferm e btc 33efd)dftt> gung, d tanbelnb, germgfitgtg* e tabeln/ migbtUtgen, f pyotefltrem e tterroorfen. h ta efcfyopf* E 4 80 Rules of Grammar. Part I. The beloved son of a respected father. An amended life is the blessed fruit of ( 1 ) repentance. (2) The most far fetched a reasons were em- ployed. (3) He is an aged b man, and afflicted with many infirmities' 1 . They are more learned than other people. He is a well-behaved 6 per- son (4), but not wealthy. (5) The moss-covered stone, and the reed-covered bank f . This young- man " is (6) conversant with modern history, and besides e that, very eloquent. (1) Say: of the repentance; and see Gr. 391. 1. (2) The preterite participle, in the superlative de- gree. Gr. 345. 194-. (3) Adjectives with the appearance of the preterite participle. Gr. 34-5. (4?) Express person by ber SOfenfcfy. (5) Gr. 345. (6) Say : with the modern history conversant. The collocation of the word conversant, bettKinbei't, after the other words with which it is connected, gives it a farther appearance of the participle. The article is to be put, in German, before modern history. Gr. 397. 2. a gefucfyt. b bejafyvt, c be&aftet* d ba$ ebrecfyen. gefittet, wofylgeftttet* { ba$ Ufer* e aupevbem. Sect. IF. 2. The Preterite Participle. 81 (1) They came running, and told a us the event b . (2) He lived unbeloved, and died unregretted c . This crime will not (3) pass unpunished d . (1) The preterite participle, combined with the verb Jtommen* Gr. 348. below. Compare 461. middle. (2) The signification of the preterite participle rendered negative by the particle utt Gr. 347. (3) To pass, hingefyetU Say: will not unpunished pass. See what is remarked on the future tense, Gr. 495. below. b ber SSorfaU* c unbebauert* d unbe* flraft. E 5 Rules of Grammar. Part L SECTION V. ON THE PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 1. The Prepositions.* ( 1 ) He did it on account of the peace. For the sake of a great advantage; for the sake of consolation ; on account of envy. * Gr. 356 375. El. 99 104. The exercises which follow will be limited to some peculiarities in the seventh chapter of the Grammar. (l) alben, and halber. Gr. 356. $alben is P re ~ ferred, when the substantive has an article or pro- noun before it. The article cannot be omitted, when the genitive has no distinctive termination. This happens in nouns feminine of the singular, and in all nouns of the plural number. Moreover, terms of a general import commonly require, in German, the article, according to Gr. 391. 1. Hence it does not frequently occur, that substantives in the genitive case are employed, without either article, adjective, or pronoun before them ; and it may, therefore, gene- rally be said, that bfllbctt is more common than Sect. V. 1. The Prepositions. 83 (1) For the sake of our friendship. (2) Not- withstanding these numerous difficulties. I value a book on (3) account of the contents 3 . The mer- chant spoke (4) to me concerning b the money. He was, this morning, (5) with me. (6) They came to meet him. (7) He stood opposite to them. (8) According to his testimony ; after this direction . The work was by (9) him brought (10) to a conclusion. (1) Urn ..... nnttem Gr. 357. (2) Ungeacfytet, Gr. 358. (3) SBegeiu Gr. 358. (4>) Say : with me. (5) With has here the signification of the French chez, in the presence of, in company of, in the house of, and is, in German, translated bet* Gr. 359. This morning must be put in the accusative, which case marks time. Gr. 4-51. (6) To meet, entgegen, Gr. 360. (gntgegen is put after the case it governs. (7) Opposite, gegenitber* Gr. 360. It is put after its case. (8) 9lacfy, Gr. 361. (9) SSotU Gr. 362. (10) Preterite participle at the end. Gr. 4-98. III. Say : to a conclusion brought. c bte E 6 84 Rules of Grammar. Part L (1) We have resided many years on the sea- coast. The boastful a giant was cast on the ground. The woman stood upon the roof of the house, and threw stones upon all the soldiers that passed by b . (2) The book was found (3) behind the curtain, (4) though I had put it behind the screen . (5) In this disposition of mind d , our hero went into the wood, and seated himself beside a thornbush 6 . (6) Over his head hung the thick (1) Next follow prepositions with the dative and accusative, the proper application of which cases is explained in the Grammar, pp. 365 372. On, fltt. Gr. 367. Upon, auf* Gr. 368. (2) ^inter, Gr. 370. (3) Preterite participle last. Say : The book was behind the curtain found : and see Gr. 498. ///. (4) Though forces the verb to the end. Say : though I it behind the screen put had. Gr. 492. (3), and 498. (5) The prepositions, in/ neben, uber, imter, uor, jjn>ifd)eiU Gr. 370 372. When a preposition, with its case, begins the sentence, the subject nominative must stand after the verb. Gr. 479. 9. Therefore, say here : In this disposition of mind went our hero. (6) A preposition, with its case, beginning the sentence. See the foregoing note. ), prafylbaft, b vorbetgefyen, c ber <5d)irm d bie @5emuth3fftmmung, the disposition of mind. e bet >ornjhaud) Sect. V. 1. The Prepositions. 85 branches of an oak ; and ( 1 ) beneath his feet a murmuring rivulet rolled a itself along b . A terrific apparition stepped at once before him ; and gave him the choice between an immediate death, and an unlimited d obedience. (2) With this (herewith) you (3) receive the history of the transaction; but I cannot say, to what (whereto (4)) the whole affair will lead. The merit of the one consists in this (herein, or there- in), (5) that he has obtained a victory over the malecontents e ; and the pretensions of the other (1) A preposition, with its case, beginning the sentence the subject nominative after the verb. Gr. 479. 9. (2) Local adverbs, with prepositions, instead of demonstrative, relative, and interrogative pronouns. Gr. 373. III. ; also 233. 10., and 24-0. 8. Exercises, p. 48. note 5. (3) When an adverb, or a preposition with its case, begins the sentence, the subject nominative is placed after the verb. Gr. 479. 8, 9. Say therefore : receive you. (4) Relative words remove the verb to the end. Gr. 490. (1). Say: whereto (ttJOJu) the whole affair lead will ; and see, besides, Gr. 495, 496. (5) That, bajj. Verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). a tt>dl$em b bahtn, c laffem d unbegrenjt* e trie 86 Rules of Grammar. Part 1, rest a upon this (hereupon), that he greatly b con- tributed to that victory. Of what (whereof) do you (1) speak? The subject, to which (whereto) (2) I alluded, refers to the question concerning the abolition of the slave-trade. (3) Lay this in there, and that in here. (4) From hence ; from thence ; from below ; for to- day . (5) On the third day of the month, and in the spring. To the greatest advantage. Into the neighbouring village. From the king down d to the beggar. (1) The subject nominative after the verb, in ques- tions. Gr. 476. 1. Say: speak you, there being no interrogative auxiliary, in German, similar to the English do. Gr. 271. 3. (2) Say, Worauf* The preposition, auf, is con- strued with the verb anfptelen, to allude ; also fid) bejtefyen, to refer to, with auf* (3) (Sin/ in adverbial composition, as fyteretn, buretn, is the preposition in, with the signification into as- signed to it. Gr. 373. at the bottom of the page. (4-) Prepositions before adverbs. Gr. 374. middle. (5) Prepositions coalescing with the definite article. Gr. 374. IV. For example, on the, am ; in the, tm ; to the, jum ; into the, tn ; from the, ttom. berufyem b fefyr, c fteiite* d f>erab Sect. V. 2. The Conjunctions. 87 2. 7%e exjunctions.* (I) The less I expected such a present, the more agreeable it was to me. The sooner you come, the sooner I may (2) go away. (3) Though many (4) persons sing the praise of (5) virtue, yet only few (6) give themselves the * Gr. 376384. El. 104107. Only some of the conjunctions will require to be illustrated in these exercises. (1) 3e and befto* Gr. 378, 379. El. 105. Sc con- stitutes the prior member, the first The, of a compa- rative sentence, and causes the verb to go to the end (Gr. 492. (3)); bejlo forms the subsequent member (Gr. 378. middle), in which the verb precedes the subject nominative. Say : The less I such a present expected, the more agreeable was it to me. The sooner you come, the sooner may I go. (2) May is to be expressed by the verb fottnetU Gr. 268. (3)jD&8lei$,obf$on* Gr.380. Ei.106. SBBenngletd), wennfcfyoru Gr. 384. El. 107. These conjunctions carry the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (4) 9ftenfd)en ; from ber SSftenfd), third declension. Gr. 145. 3. (5) Say : of the virtue; and see Gr. 391. 1. (6) Here is the subsequent member of the sentence, which is to begin with fo The words are, in German, 88 Rules of Grammar. Part I. trouble (1) of practising it. Although the master a was (2) incensed against b his pupil , (3) yet he did not chastise him. This man has never been in my house, though (4) I have frequently invited him. (5) If there should be peace, within this year, to stand thus : so give themselves yet (bod)) few the trouble it to practise. Concerning the subsequent member, and the conjunction fo/ see Gr. 482. and 380. The conjunction bod)/ yet, or bettnocf)/ nevertheless (Gr. 380.), is generally employed in the subsequent member, when the antecedent begins with obcjletcfy/ or (1) Say : it to practise ; and see Gr. 418. B. 1. (2) Incensed, aitfgebradjt, or etjlirnt : either of which words, being a preterite participle, has its place near the end of the sentence. Gr. 498. ///. Say : Although the master against his pupil incensed was. (3) Subsequent member. See the third note before this ; and say : so chastised he him yet (bod)) not. (4) The conjunctions, obgletd)/ obfdjon, wenngletd), ennfd)0n, divided. Gr. 380. 384. (5) If, n>enn, throws the verb to the end. Say, therefore : If there within this year peace be should. There, to be expressed by e ; see Exercises, 42. note (3). Should, fottte* Gr. 268. ft ber gebrer* b nriber, prep. ace. c ber Sect. V. 2. The Conjunctions. 89 (1) the prospects of (2) trade will be much ame- liorated ; but (3) should the war (4) continue 3 , two or three years (5) more, (6) the misery of the manufacturing classes' 3 will be extremely great. (7) When the commander of our army arrived in (1) Subsequent member, beginning with fo Gr. 482. (2) Say: the trade ; and refer to Gr. 391. 1. In- stead of, will be ameliorated, you may say : will ameliorate themselves ; or rather, will themselves ame- liorate; the infinitive being put last. Gr. 488. IV. (3) (SoUte* Gr. 268. The subject nominative stands after ; Gr. 483. 1 3. It is a conditional sentence, the conjunction roetin being omitted. (4) The infinitive last. Gr. 488. IV. Say : two or three years more continue. (5) More, indicating a continuation of time or ac- tion, is, in German, expressed by nod), Stod) JWCl obev bm Stafytf two or three years more. The ad- verb (dnger (longer) may also be used : jttW ober torn Sahre langer* (6) Subsequent member, the conjunction n>enn being understood in the antecedent. Gr. 482. (7) When, bd, tme, aB, conjunctions which remove the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). a bauern, wdfyrem b bie gabrifarbeiter, the manu- facturing classes. 90 Rules of Grammar. Part I. the town, (1) joy and hope were spread among all the inhabitants. (2) After he had (3) inspected the works of fortification % and given his orders, in (4) what manner the defence was (5) to be con- ducted, (6) he led a part of the garrison to the relief b of a neighbouring city, (7) which was menaced by the enemy. (1) Subsequent member. Gr. 480. 12. Instead of, were spread, it may be, in German, spread themselves, verbretteten ftcfy. (2) After, nad)bem ; the verb last. Gr. 492. (3). (3) The auxiliary, had, belongs here to two verbs, or rather to two participles, inspected and given. As it is forced to the end by the conjunction after, it will have its place after the last of those participles, and the whole sentence runs thus : After he the works of fortification inspected, and his orders given had. Gr. 4-20. (4) A relative pronoun, or one which forms an in- direct question, forces the verb to the end. Gr. 490. (1). In what manner, auf tt>eld)e 7(rt ? (5) Was to be conducted. Say: should be con- ducted, or rather, conducted be should. Should, folltc* Gr. 268. (6) Subsequent member, with fo Gr. 482. (7) A pronoun relative carries the verb to the end. Gr.490. (1). bie gejlungSwerfe* b bie (Sntfekung* c bebrofyen. Sect. F. 2. The Conjunctions. 91 ( 1 ) The learned as well as the unlearned ; (2) both in science, and in the experience of (3) real life. (4) However cold the weather may be, (5) yet the fresh air of the country 3 will be con- ducive to his health. (6) The colour was not brown, but red ; and the cloth not one, but two yards broad. (7) When a person sees his error, and is willing to rectify it, (8) it is reasonable to (9) grant b him ( 1 ) As well as, fo VDOfyl aI3 aitcfy ; or fo WOfyl a!6 Gr. 381. 5. Say : so well (fo tt)0l)l) the learned, as also (al aud)) the unlearned; bie elefyrten tint) Unge* lefyrtetu Gr. 187. IX. i. (2) Both and, fo Wofyl, aid aud), (3) Say: of the real life; and see Gr. 391. 1. (4) @0, with aild) following, signifies however. (Gr. 381. 6.), and brings the verb to the end. (5) Subsequent member, with fo Gr.482. Yet, t>ocfy (6) onbenu Gr. 382. El. 106. (7) The conjunction When, connected with differ- ent tenses, and, accordingly, differently rendered, in German, Gr. 382., always makes the verb go to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Here it is to beroenn, A person, jemanb* Gr. 242. 3. (8) Subsequent member, beginning with fo* Gr. 482. (9) Infinitive to the end. Gr. 495. IV. tie ganbluft, the air of the country. > , with fur, prep, ace., to grant indulgence to. 92 Rules of Grammar. Part L every possible indulgence. The child will (1) con- demn its foolish mother, when it shall have come to years of discretion. (2) When, at last, the long expected account arrived, (3) every one found himself deceived (4) in his hope. Come tome, (5) when you have spoken with your friend. (6) Well ! what does he do? He advances 3 with his regi- ment, (7) meets a detachment b of the enemy, and defeats it; but (8) when he arrives within a (1) Say : will its foolish mother condemn ; and see Gr. 495. (2) When, connected with the preterite, or past tense, is not to be rendered by roenm Gr. 382. (3) Subsequent member. Every one, feberrnflniU (4) Preterite participle last. Gr. 498. ///. (5) Here rcentt is proper, though joined to a pre- terite tense, you have spoken ; because the action implied is not really passed, but only stated so by anticipation. Gr. 383. (6) Well, gut ! or nim, might here be used. What does he do ? waS tl)Ut Ct ? (7) To meet, begegnen, construed with the dative : or here perhaps better, treffen, verb irregular, con- strued with the preposition auf, and the accusative. (8) When is here not to be rendered by roenn, but by ttrie, d3, or t>a ; for, though we use the present tense, we speak of time past. Gr. 383 t>orrucfen, b bie TCbtbeilung, c f ommen* Sect. V. 2. The Conjunctions. 93 short distance of (I) the town, (2) he halts, and loses (3) again the advantage (4) which he had obtained a . (5) When do you go out? When have you been there ? (6) If the summer be dry, (7) the owner may (8) expect (9) a very plentiful crop from this particular kind of land. But I do (10) not know, (11) if it succeeds 15 in general. (1) Of is here to be rendered by tton, (2) Subsequent member. Gr. 480. 12. (3) The adverb has its natural place after the object. Gr. 500. //. Say, therefore : loses the ad- vantage again. (4) Which, the relative, makes the verb go to the end. Gr.490. (1). (5) In interrogative sentences, when is always to be rendered by wann, Gr. 383. (6) If, wenm Gr. 383. (7) Subsequent member with fo, Gr. 482. and 383. 2. (8) May, farm, Gr. 268. ; or barf, Gr. 269. 2. (9) Say : a very plentiful crop from this particular, kind of land expect : the infinitive last, according to Gr. 495. IV. (10) Say: / know not: the auxiliary verb do being excluded from the German language. Gr. 271. 3. (11) If, being synonymous with whether, is not to be expressed in German by tt>emt The right term, for that idea, is ob, Gr. 383. at the bottom of the page. a gevtrinnem b glucfen, geltngem 94 Rules of Grammar. Part I. (1) Although the weather should (2) be unfa- vourable, and though (3) it should rain or snow, (4) I must nevertheless* go out. Can you (5) perhaps (6) tell me, how (7) far it is to (8) the river? I certainly (9) know how far it is to the village, but about (10) the precise dis- tance, after (11) which you inquire, (12) I am doubtful. (1) SBenngleid), wennfcfyom Gr. 384. The verb last, after this conjunction. Gr. 492. (3). (2) Should, follte. Gr. 268. middle. (3) Before a monosyllabic pronoun, like c6/ in this place, the conjunctions, roenn^letcT;, obgleid), wennfcfyon, obfcfyOtt, are generally divided. Gr. 380. (4) Subsequent member, with fo. Gr. 482. (5) You. See concerning the pronouns of address, Gr.217. 3. (6) Perhaps, m\)l. Gr. 384. 459. El. 107. (7) How far makes here an indirect question, which brings the verb to the end. Gr. 492. 2. Say : how far it to the river is 9 (8) To, bt an, preposition accusative. Gr. 368. (9) Certainly, wohl* The adverb after the verb. Gr. 500. //. (10) About, wegett, prep. gen. Gr. 358. (11) After which. Say: whereafter, tronad) ; and see Gr. 240. 8., and 375. III. (12) Say : am I; for the subject stands after t>ennod> Sect. V. 2. The Conjunctions. 95 (1) It is, indeed, a large and ponderous 3 book, but the contents b are very light. It is a consider- able sum, (2) I allow it, but one (3) must not forget, how much more considerable the object is, (4) which (5) is to be purchased by (6) that money. the verb, when a preposition, with its case, begins the sentence. Gr. 479. 9. (1) 3war. Gr.384. El. 107. (2) This parenthetical idea is well expressed by $wan (3) One, man, indefinite pronoun. Gr. 241. 2. (4) Pron. relative : verb last. (5) Say, either: shall be purchased, according to Gr. 265. ; or, is to purchase, by Gr. 343. The first mode is the best. To purchase, erfollfen. See the signification of the prefix er, Gr. 331. 1. (6) XHirrf), with the accusative ; or mtt, with the dative. fcfywerfdttig* 96 Rules of Grammar. Parti. SECTION VI. 1 ON THE AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. * 1. Agreement and Government of the Article, Noun, and Pronoun.-^ (1) Turkey, and Wallachia; Lusatia, and Swit- zerland. (2) The Palatinate. * This is the first chapter of the Syntax. Gr. 388. 432. f Gr. 388 406. (1) The article, whether definite or indefinite, must agree with the noun to which it belongs, in gender, number, and case. Gr. p. 388. The instances are enumerated in which it is either used or not used ; and some names of countries are given, to which the Germans prefix the article. Gr. 389. 4. (2) te Spffllj. This word has the article in English, as well as in German. 1 With this Section begins the Second Part of the Grammar, or the Syntax. I have thought it un- necessary to recommence a new division in the Exer- cises. The Sections proceed without any regard to this main distinction in the Grammar. The attention of the student will only be directed to such things as Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Article. 97 (1) The bearer of this will deliver a my com- mands ; and I expect that (2) the people b will return in the best order, before the conclusion* of the play d . The attorney 6 has (3) all the writings f in mark the peculiarity of the German idiom, or as may, in general, tend to his instruction. Where the Eng- lish language coincides with the German, it would be superfluous to afford any practical illustrations. The examples of this, and of the next Section, which embrace the first two ghapters of the Syntax, will, therefore, appear somewhat unconnected, and of a miscellaneous description. As the ELEMENTS do not extend to the Syntax, they will not be quoted any more. (1) The article omitted in German, before the words printed in Italics. Gr. 390. 8. (2) That makes the verb go to the end. Gr. 492. (3). It may, here, also govern the subjunctive mood. Gr.411. 1. (3) The word all is, in German, employed without the article. Gr. 400. (2). Say, therefore: all writings. The article, however, may stand after atte, when an adjective follows : and ought to be made use of when the substantive to which afte belongs is con- 3 mtttfyeifen, eroffnem b bie Seutc, plur. ba SSoIf* c bte (Snbtgung. d bas> cfyaufpiel. f bie cfyrift, 98 Rules of Grammar. Part I. (1) his hands ; and we have all the injurious conse- quences, which will arise* from that circumstance, before (1) our eyes. (2) The spirit h , courage , and understanding of the man were conspicuous. The most welcome, agreeable, and unexpected intelligence. The pride, ambition d , and good fortune 6 of this general have involved the world in trouble f and confusion. (3) The lion and the fox ; the mouse and the cat : the horse and the mule. nected with a relative, as in the subsequent example, all the injurious consequences which. (1) The pronouns are here omitted, in the same way as was the article in the preceding examples. Gr. 390. 8. (2) One article will serve for several nouns, if they be all of the same gender, number, and case. But if they vary in any one of these respects, the article must, accordingly, be changed. Gr. 391. 10. (3) When there are only two substantives, joined by Uttb, and, it is usual to repeat the article, though they should both be of the same gender, number, and case. This is stated, Gr. 391. middle. It applies particularly to titles and superscriptions ; for instance, entflehen, entfpnngem b ber eifh c ber Sftutft, c baa lucf f btc Unripe, Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Article. 99 (I) Fortune is changeable, but wisdom and virtue remain for ever a the same. Nature has formed man* for the enjoyment of life; folly (2) often frus- trates the beneficent designs of Providence. (3) We find in history many examples, (4) that virtue is rewarded, and vice punished : but holy writ gives us the positive assurance, (4) that, after this life, a just retribution d will take 6 place, for all in fables : and there not only two words, but three or more, would, for the sake of distinctness, require the repetition of the article. (1) Nouns substantive, of a comprehensive and general meaning, which are, in English, vised without the article, have the article in German. Gr. 391. 1. They are printed in Italics above. (2) Say : frustrates often ; the adverb having its proper place after the verb. Gr. 500. //. It is there said, that it should also be after the object ; but it seems that the adverb often is best stationed next to the verb. (3) Certain other words require, in German, the article, which, in English, are employed without it. Gr. 392. 2. (4) That brings the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say, therefore : that the virtue rewarded^ and the vice punished is. bte 2Cbff dbt* tatt fyaben, F 2 100 Rules of Grammar. Parti. our actions. (1 ) To live in town, and not (2) to go to church, is (3) with some people synonymous a . (4) He has been in the East Indies ; and will soon go to the West Indies. (5) The former coun- try is less b unwholesome than the latter. (6) Tfie said person has hitherto enjoyed very good health. (7) More than half the island was in our pos- session. Take half the number, and see (8) what the calculation will then produce . (1) The article used, in some other instances, by the Germans, where omitted by the English. Gr. 392. 2. (2) To go to church, in bte Jttrofye gefyen. (3) With, bet, preposition with the dative. (4) The article omitted, in German, before certain words, where it is made use of, in English. Gr. 392. 3. (5) The former, @rj!ere ; the latter, ge^tereS* Gr. 392. 3. (6) Article omitted before such words, as said, aforesaid, mentioned. Gr. 392. 3. (7) If fyalb, like the English half, is to be employed as an adjective, with the article, the article must stand before it. Gr. 393. 4. It is, however, more common, instead of the adjective halb/ with the definite article, to make use of the substantive, bte ^alfte ; as, bte J5dlfte bet Snfel, one half of the island^ (8) An indirect question, which requires the verb to be at the end. Gr. 492. (2). a gletcfybebeutenb* b ntcfyt fo c betragem Sect. VL 1. Ayr. and Gov. of the Substantive. 101 (1) Jerusalem Delivered, a poem (2) written by Tasso, is (3) reckoned among the superior a pro- ductions 1 * of the human mind c : yet it cannot be compared with Milton's Paradise Lost. (4) Such a man deserves (5) the hatred and de- testation of posterity. (6) The nation received the victorious hero, its (1) The article to be prefixed, in this manner: the delivered Jerusalem. Gr. 393. 5. But the article is not admitted, when a genitive case precedes, as Milton's Paradise Lost, SDWtOn'S fSerlorene $ata* t>te, though, in this instance also, the adjective must be placed before the substantive. (2) Say: by Tasso written; for the preterite participle is generally put after the words with which it is connected. (3) Say : to reckon ; by Gr. 343. \ and, more- over, the infinitive to be put last, so that the sentence will be thus expressed : is among the superior pro- ductions of the human mind to reckon. (4) Gr. 395. at the bottom of the page. (5) The hatred and detestation to be put in the accusative case, after the transitive verb deserves. Gr. 429. IV. (6) Nouns Substantive. Two or more substantives, c t>er eif!, F 3 ] 02 Rules of Grammar. Part I. defender, and protector, with loud acclamations of joy a . To its former favourite, the traitor, and enemy of his country, (1) it gave the appellations which he deserved. (2) Twenty yards of velvet; seven measures of oil ; a company of dragoons. Six ounces of fine silk ; (3) half a pound of coarse yarn. A regiment of young soldiers. relating to the same object, or forming an apposition, must stand in the same case. Gr. 394-. /. The words, here, in apposition, are first, hero, defender, and pro- tector, in the accusative, after the transitive verb, received; and afterwards, favourite, traitor, and enemy, in the dative, governed by gave. Gr. 426. I. The Nation, bag 83i>lf. (1) Say: gave it; because the dative case begins the sentence, which circumstance carries the subject after the verb. Gr. 477. 3. (2) The genitive case is generally indicated by the preposition of; but, after words denoting measure and quantity, that case is not required in German (Gr. 394.), except when the substantive is accom- panied by an adjective. (3) Say : a half pound ; applying to the indefi- nite article with the word half the same remark which was made concerning the definite article, Gr. 393. 4. t, acclamations of joy. Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Goo. of the Substantive. 103 (1) The four provinces (2) of Ireland % and the twelve counties of Wales b . The thirteen govern- ments of Russia* 1 , and the ten circles 6 of Ger- many f . A man (3) of noble birth, and of great virtue. A depth of forty fathoms. (4) A cup g of gold; a staff of ivory. (5) He is a pattern of an honest man. (6) The motives of the actions of the French are not easy to be (7) understood 11 . (8) The (1) Use of the preposition x>on, in the room of the genitive case. Gr. 395. (2) 83cm, before names which do not admit an article. Gr. 395. 1. (3) SSon, expressing quality, condition, proportion. Gr. 395. 2. (4) SSoit, signifying the material of which things are made. Gr. 395. 3. (5) SSon, before the indefinite article, to denote character. Gr. 395. 4. (6) SSon, employed to avoid the repetition of geni- tive cases. Gr. 396. 5. (7) To be understood ; say to understand. (8) The genitive case has its natural place after the word by which it is governed ; but sometimes it stands before it. Gr. 394. ///. Refer also to Gr. 144. 1. c bte tattfealterfcfyaft. f >eutfd)lanb. ber SSe* F 4 104 Rules of Grammar. Part I. boy's father was my intimate friend. The king's word should never be called in question a . (1) A wise man, a sensible woman, an obedient child. The (2) learned (man), though he should be poor, possesses nevertheless extraordinary ad- vantages 1 " over c his ignorant neighbour. (3) On the third of this month, I (4) intend to set off for London. (5) Philip the Fair d was the father of Charles (1) The agreement of the Adjective with its Sub- stantive, It must agree in gender, number, and case. Gr. 397. I. (2) The substantive, man, is not to be expressed, according to Gr. 187. IX. 1.; but, as it is understood, the adjective is regulated by it, in its agreement. (3) After the third, understand day, which being, in German, a masculine, the adjective (for a numeral, especially an ordinal, as here, the third, comes under that character) must be in that gender. It will be the accusative case, conformably to Gr. 4-51. (4-) Sav : intend I ; the subject, 7, after the verb, because an oblique case begins the sentence. Gr. 477. 3. 479. 8. The infinitive last, Gr. 495. IV. Here the infinitive must be used with Jit. Gr. 418. B. 2. To set off, abretfett, compound separable. Gr. 320. 3. For, nad) (5) The position of the adjective is commonly before its substantive (Gr. 397. //.) ; in some in- a To call in question, in 3^ e if e ^ J^tjcn, t>er SSor^ug* c wr, prep. dat. d tier Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Adjective. 105 the Fifth : a prince, (1) not remarkable, in (2) his- tory, for a any splendid achievement. But his son, (3) clever, active, and ambitious, has b acquired (4) a great share of that fame, (5) which mankind bestow (6) upon warriors and statesmen. (7) Thirty pounds Irish make d about 6 twenty- nine pounds English. stances, after it, viz. when the adjective forms a sort of appellative in apposition with a proper name. Gr. 397. 1. (1) The adjective stands after the substantive, when it supplies the place of a relative sentence. Gr. 397. 2. (2) Say : in the history ; and see Gr. 392. 2. (3) The adjective, again supplying the place of a relative sentence, and standing after the substantive. Gr. 397. 2. (4) The preterite participle goes to the end. Gr. 498. IV. Say : has a great share of that fame acquired. (5) The relative makes the verb go to the end. Gr.490. (1). (6) To bestow upon, betlegen, betmeffen, juetgnen, all verbs which govern the dative case of the person without a preposition. Gr. 426. III. (7) Adjectives derived from names of places and countries are, in certain phrases, put after the sub- stantives. Gr. 398. 3. a ttJegetl, preposition with the genitive. b fid) erroerbetu c bie SSftenfcfyen* d betragetu F 5 106 Rules of Grammar. Parti. (1) The person 3 whom I saw was perhaps not in want b of the money ; but ('2) as I was tired c of the trouble of (3) carrying it about with me, and wished to be quit of (4) it, (5) I gave it to him. I am conscious (6) of no other motive in this business, and I hope you will not think (7) me capable of a (1) Some adjectives govern cases. Gr. 398. ///. First, those with the genitive. Gr.398. ///. 1. These adjectives are generally put after the cases which they govern. Gr. 488. IV. (2) As causes the verb to go to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (3) Say: to carry ; and see Gr.418. B. 1. The infinitive stands last: it with me about to carry. Gr. 495. IV. To carry about, fyerumtragen, a verb compound separable. Gr. 320. 3. (4) Of it, bejfen* Gr.404. 5. Quit,lo. (5) Subsequent member. Gr. 480. 12. Say: gave I it to him. (6) Conscious, bewufjt* It is construed, besides the genitive case of the thing, with the dative of the person, so that you must say : / am to me of no other motive in this business conscious. Gr. 398. ///. 1. Business, btC @ad)C* (7) Say : you will not think that I am capable. ber SRenfty* b beburftig, ufeerbrufftg. Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Adjective. 107 wrong design. I (1) should not deem such an allegation worth (2) attention 3 ; (3) nor will you judge, (4) that I have rendered myself guilty of any levity b . (5) A thing (6) may be agreeable to (7) the eye and taste, but hurtful to health. Employ- ment is useful to our mind ; idleness is prejudicial* (1) First future conditional. Gr. 495. at the bottom of the page. To deem, acfyteru (2) Say : the attention; and see Gr. 391. 1. (3) Render nor, in this situation, by dud) ntcfyt, putting the negative tttcfyt after the verb ; atld), also, before the verb ; literally thus : also will you not" 3Cltd)/ beginning a sentence, will make the subject go after the verb. Gr.479. 10. (4) That brings the verb to the end. Gr. 4-92. (3). The preterite participle stands likewise near the end. Gr. 498. ///. The whole thus : that I myself of any levity guilty rendered have. (5) Adjectives governing the dative case. Gr. 399. ///. 2. A thing, ettt>a, or etne acfye* (6) May, fanru Gr. 268. (7) To the eye and taste: these are dative cases, governed by the adjective agreeable, angencfyttU It is mentioned, Gr. 399. middle, that, in many instances, instead of a mere dative case, a preposition may be a bie 33ead)tung, b ber geid)tfimu c ber gang, d nacfytfyeUig, v 6 108 Rules of Grammar, Parti. both to the body and the soul. A servant (1) ought to be obedient and faithful to his master. What is convenient 3 - to one person b , may be trou- blesome to another. Happy is the son, (2) who is equal to his father (3) in merit. We are always favourably inclined* towards those whose opinion coincides with our own. It is known to all men d , how (4) formidable he is to his enemies. (5) This board 6 should be one foot long, and half a foot, or six inches, broad. A stone weigh- employed. After agreeable, for example, the prepo- sition fur, with the accusative, might be made use of. (1) Ought, mufj* Gr. 270. (2) The relative puts the verb to the end. Gr. 490. (1). Say : who to his father in merit equal (gldd)) is. (3) In, here, am Gr. 367- 4. (4) How, forming an indirect question, makes the verb go to the end. Gr.492. (2). The adjective, it has before been observed, is placed after the case which it governs ; but when the adjective is in connection with the interrogative how, it must remain near it, and cannot be put after the case which it governs. Say, therefore : how formidable he to his enemies is. (.5) Adjectives governing the accusative case. Gr. 399. 3. " Sftenfcfy. genetgt d Sftenfcfyem e ba3 S3ret* Sect. VL 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Adjective. 109 ing* a hundred weight b . A little dog, which is only a month old. I am indebted to (1) him one dollar. (2) There were only twelve of us, against thirty of them. (3) All the glory of a long war does not com- pensate the misery (4) which a few days may in- flict upon mankind. (5) All the calamities, which were foretold by some enlightened men, have en- (1) Indebted, fcfyulbtQ. / am indebted means I owe ; which idea is, in German, constantly ex- pressed by that adjective. It is construed with the dative case of the person to whom we owe, and the accusative of the thing which we owe. Gr. 399. 3. (2) Cardinal numbers, governing the genitive case. Gr.400. (1). (3) Gr. 400. (2). 2Ctte, all, is used in German without the article following. (4) The relative causes the verb to be placed last. Gr. 490. ( I ). To inflict, juf tt^en/ a verb which governs the dative case without a preposition ; therefore say, ben SSftenfcfyen juftigen* (5) 2U/ with the article, when a relative pronoun follows. See Exercises, p. 97. note 3. fcbwer, * ter Sentner, c oergutem 110 Rules of Grammar. Parti. sued. (1) All my friends suffer under the pres- sure ; (2) all that was ours is lost. (3) All of us are ruined; (4) all this concerns* us. I speak only of myself and my particular friends ; (5) of all the rest, I (6) know nothing. We sigh, and we weep; but all (7) these tears are useless b . (8) This man, and his daughter, who was the (1) This may be expressed by all mine, atte tie SftetntgetU Gr. 400. middle. (2) Say : all ours, alleS t>a UnfrtQC ; the article belongs to the possessive pronoun, as before. (3) Say : we all. Gr. 401. above. Put the words thus, we are all. (4) 2tt/ following the word to which it belongs, as here : this all. Gr. 400. at the bottom of the page. (5) Gr. 400. at the bottom of the page, (6) Say: know I; the subject after the verb, because a preposition, with its case, begins the sen- tence. Gr. 479. 9. (7) Say: these tears all. Gr. 400. at the bottom of the page. (8) Pronouns, possessive, demonstrative, and inter- rogative, agree with the substantives to which they belong, in gender, number, and case ; the relative, in number and gender. Gr. 401. 1. , irr. sep. betrejfen, irr. insep. * Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Pronoun. Ill prettiest girl in the ball room*, departed late". Their servants waited ( 1 ) for them, and they took the road c which leads to the sea. (2) He gave me a pen, but it (3) would not write : I wished to (4) make use of my pencil d , but it broke in pieces e . The horse is come back (1) To wait, war ten, is, in German, construed with attf, prep. ace. (2) The pronoun it, is, in English, indiscriminately applied to inanimate objects : but the German lan- guage requires that, in these objects, the gender should be accurately distinguished. Thus, it, in re- ference to a pen, which is of the feminine gender, must be expressed by fie, she; in reference to pencil, which is a masculine, by er, he. On the other hand, he, in reference to the horse, must be rendered by e, it, because horse is, in German, a neuter. Gr. 401. 1. (3) Would, woUte* Gr.265. (4J To make use of, fid) bebtenen a reflective verb, with the genitive case. Gr. 424. 4. a ba Sanjstmmer, ber @aal b weggefyen, irr. sep. c ber SBeQ* d ber SSUtfiift* e jerbrecfyen, entjroetbre* d)en, to break in pieces ; the first inseparable, the second separable. 112 Rules of Grammar. Part I. alone; and it (1) is conjectured 8 , (2) that he has (3) thrown his rider. (4) I have broken my arm ; she has burnt her finger. They have shortened their labour. I have this morning received your letter, and communi- cated (5) it to your friend. The speech was pub- licly recited b , and every one assented to it A . I was also well satisfied 6 (6) with it. (7) It is a (1) Say: one conjectures, man. Gr. 241. 2. (2) The conjunction that removes the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (3) To throiv off", abwerfert, verb compound separa- ble. Gr. 320. 4. (4) Gram. 401. (5) Use of the demonstrative pronoun, instead of the third personal ; especially of berfelbe, which is here to be employed instead of it. Gr. 402. 3. (6) Say : therewith, bamtt* Gr. 233. 10. (7) The pronoun eS beginning a sentence, without regard to gender or number. Gr. 403. 4. It often represents the English adverb there, in the beginning of sentences, as in this : there are many inhabitants in this village ; for which you must say, it are many inhabitants. BemtlttfyetU b ttorlefen, to recite, irr. sep. c ge* ace. d ft'e, in reference to t>te SRebe, f. e feftr ufriet>en. Sect. VI. 1. Agr. and Gov. of the Pronoun. 113 lion, it is a hyaena. There are many inhabitants in this village. There prevails a a doubt concerning this circumstance. (1) The watchman comes, (1) the thieves fly. (2) Long live the King. The acccuser produced a witness, and said a great deal b in (3) his praise, (4) in order to con- ciliate the j udge's opinion towards him c . The j ury, however, remained impartial : they considered* 1 (1) Begin this sentence with e3, and put the sub- ject after the verb, thus : It comes the watchman, it fly the thieves. Gr. 403. 4. 478. 5. (2) Begin with (*3, Gr. 223. 5. (3) The genitive case of a demonstrative pronoun, in some situations to be preferred to a possessive pro- noun. Gr. 404. 5. (4) In order to, expressing purpose or design, UW JU* Gr. 418. 2. The infinitive last ; Gr. 495. IV. 3u stands immediately before it; but the particle Ultl, which may be supposed to answer the English for, is put in the beginning, thus : "for the judge's opinion towards him to conciliate. a fyettfcfyen, obroaltem b tttel, or febr mel* c urn bem SJtcfyter erne gute 9ftetnung t>on bemfelben betju* bvingetl, to conciliate the judge's opinion towards him. ll Ctwagen, irreg. insep. 114 Rules of Grammar. Parti. attentively* the life both of the accuser and the accused ; observed their (1) manners and passions; and, after mature reflection, (2) ultimately gave their verdict". The judge concurred in their sen- tence 11 , and praised its* propriety f and justice. He begged and exhorted, till he was quite tired (8) of it. It was not the house of the minister, but that of his secretary. I have seen the country- seat* of the general h , and that of his brother. The latter I (4) like the best. (1) Their will be berer, or berett, in the plural. Gr. 404. 5. (2) Place the adverb after the verb : gave ulti- mately. Gr. 500. //. Ultimately, julefcr, or enbltd), is one of those adverbs which cannot well be put after the object. (3) Of it, beffem Gr. 405. middle. Tired, mube, itbetbtltfftg, adjectives which govern the genitive case. Gr. 398. III. 1. (4) Say : pleases me best, Qcfdllt mtr am a mit S5cbad}t b einen 2u3fptud) tfyun, to give a verdict c etn(ltmmen, to concur, sep. d b ber ,ftampfylafe. c t>a (Signal* 120 Rules of Grammar. Part L (1) He who thinks, that it is enough to (2) show an appearance of bravery, without reality, is extremely (3) mistaken. We (4) ought not to de- lude ourselves with the opinion 3 , that our enemy is an insignificant adversary. I will not main- tain, (5) that he is invincible ; but I doubt (1) The use of the subjunctive mood. Gr.411. /. 1. The conjunction that, in certain situations, requires it. He who is WCr* When this pronoun is alone with the verb, as it is here, the adverb btf accompanies it, in a manner similar to the connection of this particle with the relative bet, tie, ba* Gr. 236. 238. above. SBer ba glaubt* (2) Say : an appearance of bravery, without reality, to shoiv. The infinitive last. Gr. 495. IV. (3) To be mistaken, fid) irren ; a reflective verb. The adverb extremely (febt) is to be placed after the verb, and also after the word fid), Gr. 500. //. (4) We ought, wit niuffett, without the preposition U before the infinitive following. Gr. 270. 416. 3. (5) TJiat must not here be followed by the sub- junctive mood, because the verb maintain cannot well be conceived, as producing an idea of uncertainty. Gr. 412. But whether that govern the indicative or subjunctive mood, it causes the verb equally to go to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Sect. VI. 2. 4gr. and Gov. of the Verb. 121 (1) whether this nation has ever had to contend with a more formidable power. We must not imagine that our situation alone can protect us; but be convinced (2), that energy* and vigour b are requisite, to frustrate the attacks, which (3) may (1) ;Db, whether, seems, from the nature of its signification, always to involve an idea of uncertainty. Yet the usage of the language licenses, in many instances, the indicative mood after it. But when the idea of uncertainty is rendered so palpable as it is here, by the verb jwetfetn, I consider it as consistent and proper to prefer the subjunctive. The con- junctions which are to have the subjunctive mood are, in the Exercises, printed in Italics. jDb throws the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). Say : whether this nation ever with a more formidable power to con- tend had has. (2) After iiber eitQt fet)n, the conjunction that, cannot be supposed to require the subjunctive mood. Gr. 412. at the bottom of the page. (3) May, expressed by the verb f fatten* Gr.264. ; and it will be best to say might, and to put the verb fonnett in the preterimperfect of the subjunctive mood. In the same tense, the verb burfett would here, likewise, answer our purpose. Third person plural tmrftem Gr. 269. (4). We Jfraftf&fle* b bte @etjte6ffdrfe* 122 Rules of Grammar. Part I. be made against our independence. (1) If a man be rich, (2) he ought, (3) if he will not expose himself to the reproach of the world, (4) to beware of a parsimonious and mean disposition. (5) There are, however, persons", who would spend (1) The conjunction tt)Cttn never takes the subjunc- tive mood in German, unless it corresponds with a con- ditional future ; thus : / would come, if I were invited. I would come, is a conditional future, with which the sentence, if I were invited, corresponds ; and there, the verb were invited, after if, must be in the sub- junctive mood. If, wenn, throws the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). (2) Subsequent member with fo, when if precedes. Gr.480. 12. 380. 2. (3) Say : if he himself not to the reproach of the world expose will. (4) To beware, fid) fytlten, verb reflective, construed with the preposition ttor* Say : himself fid) before ttor the reproach of the world beware. (5) There is, or, there are, in a general and in- definite sense, is expressed by c Qiebt, literally, it gives. The substantive belonging to it to be put in the accusative, as after a transitive verb. However, inbeffen, jebodv geute* Sect. VI. 2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 123 more money than they have, even ( 1 ) if they pos- sessed estates of immense value. If I were in such circumstances, I would endeavour to be liberal without prodigality, and prudent a without avarice. (2) Though he had the power, he would not op- press the nation 15 ; he would act (3) as if he were (4) its father, and (5) treat his subjects as if they were his children. (6) He thinks it is better to bear the loss, than (1) Here if, wettn, requires possessed to be in the subjunctive mood, because it is in correspondence with a conditional future, would spend. Even if, felbj! n>enm (2) Though and although follow the same rule, in governing the subjunctive mood, as if: namely, they require that mood, if the sentence to which those conjunctions belong corresponds with a con- ditional tense, as here : he would not oppress. (3) As if, al Ob/ is followed by the subjunctive mood, under the same circumstances as though, al- though, if. See the preceding note. (4) Express its by beffen ; and see Gr. 404. 5. (5) Render treat here by beCjCgneit/ construed with the dative. (6) The subjunctive mood must be used, when the conjunction baf, or roettn, is understood. Gr. 413. 2. The observation applies to the following sentences : He thinks it is better, which stands for, he thinks that a bebacfytfam, fpatfam* b ba$ SSolf. G 2 124 Rules of Grammar. Part I. to involve himself in an expensive and doubtful lawsuit 3 . Were I in his place, (1) I should en- tertain 11 a more favourable opinion of the justice of this country, and not endure a manifest wrong, .from a pusillanimous apprehension of disadvan- tageous consequences. (2) Should the issue be unfavourable, the consciousness of (3) having acted according to a right principle would console me. Had I even (4) known it, (5) I should, neverthe- less, have (6) held it to be my duty, as a member it is better. Were I in his place, for, if I were in his place. Should the issue be unfavourable, for, if the issue should be unfavourable. Had I even known it, for, if I had even known it. (1) The subsequent member ought always to begin with fo, when, in the antecedent member, the conjunc- tion weitn, if, is understood. Gr. 482. 381. (2) (goUte. Gr. 265. above. (3) Say : to have acted; and see Gr. 418. B. 1. (4) This stands for, although I had known it. Even, aud). (5) Again the subsequent member, with fo. (6) Say: held it for (fur) my duty, fatten, to hold, is, in that sense, combined with the preposition fur* The position of the sentence will be this: so should I, nevertheless, as a member of society, it for my duty field have, against injustice to struggle. Sect. VI. 2. Ayr. and Gov. of the Verb. 125 of (1) society, to struggle a against injustice. If* they are but contented ; if she is well, I am happy ; if it pleases you. (2) Be it so ! (3) Let him say what (4) he will ! The thing (5) had not turned (1) Society, civil society, bte menfd)Ud)e efeUfcfyaft* The article must be vfsed, of the society, bet menfd)* ltd)en efellfcfyaft, according to Gr.391. 1. * If before the present indicative. Gr.415. middle. (2) The subjunctive mood, denoting a wish, or a concession. See Gr.415. 3. In English, the nomina- tive is placed after the verb, be it so : in German, before it, thus : It be so ; he say what he will. But with mogen (see Gr. 264. 3.) the nominative stands after it: mag e fo fet)Jt; or, better, Qefe^t e fei SOBenn e aud) fo ware* (3) To be expressed by say he, er fage, or, er mag fagen. (4) It is not unusual to put this, what he will, when thus connected with a preceding subjunctive, in the same mood : tt)a$ er Vt>oUe/ for, tt)a er Will/ though the latter is to be considered as equally correct. (5) The subjunctive mood, employed to express a supposition. Gr. 415. 3. Had turned out is the preterpluperfect subjunctive here, in meaning, the same as the second future conditional, would have turned out. To turn out, auSfalleit/ a verb neuter, taking the auxiliary fet)tt Gr. 304. I. It is, besides, a compound separable (Gr. 315.); the preterite parti- ciple, therefore, is, aitSgefaUen* a fdmpfen, G 3 126 Rules of Grammar. Part I. out so, if the slightest precaution (1) had been used. (2) He would have preserved* his property, and those unhappy men their (3) lives. (4) I should not have dreamt of such folly. (1) This must be the subjunctive mood, after if, the sentence being connected with a conditional tense; or say, actively, fydtte man nitr t>ie geringjh SSorftcfyt gebraucfyt* (2) Express this by the pluperfect subjunctive, He had preserved. (3) Life is a word which admits no plural in German. Gr. 154. B. 1. Say, therefore, their life. The German language applies similar words, in the singular, collectively, to more subjects than one. The singular number would, consequently, still have been made use of, though the word in question should have furnished a plural. In this practice, the Greek and Latin languages, and most of the modern tongues, coincide. It is the English language alone which is so scrupulous in the application of the plural. For example, fifty citizens have given in their names; but in German and other languages, it is perfectly correct and grammatical to say, fifty citizens have given in their name. (4) The subjunctive expressing surprise is, gene- rally, accompanied by the particle t>orf)/ however. Gr. 41 6. at the top of the page. Say : Had /, however (bod)), not of this folly dreamt! a retten* Sect. VI. 2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 127 (1) To write, to read; to hear, to speak. (2) To boast is more easy than to achieve a great enterprise; but all (3) talking is of (4) no use, without proof of the reality. (5) One may call it (6) working : but it is, in fact, (6) playing. (7) You may (8) remain here, but I must go away. I dare not wait any longer ; (9) lam to be at (10) the (1) The infinitive mood. Gr.416 420. First, without the preposition jiu Gr.416. A. The infini- tive, as found in dictionaries. Gr. 416. A. 1. (2) The infinitive in the room of a substantive. Gr. 4-16. 2. (3) This participle is likewise to be expressed by the infinitive. The infinitive is then considered as a substantive of the neuter gender. Gr. 343. below ; 459. at the top of the page. The adjective all must, therefore, be put in the neuter, atte (4) Of no use, Utmfife* (5) One, mam Gr. 241. 2. (6) Again the infinitive. (7) The infinitive, after the verbs, f ottttett, moQCtt, lajten, bttrfen, follen/ rootten, muffetu Gr. 416. 3. Those verbs are printed in Italics. (8) You may ; verb, f otttten, Gr. 268. (9) lam to be; verb, follem Gr. 265. (10) At the Exchange, aitf bet S3orfe, o 4 128 Rules of Grammar. Parti. Exchange at one o'clock a ; I will come to you this evening, if my illness permits me to go out; my sister (1) may say what she likes. (2) He bid me go. I heard the child cry, and then saw it sink from fatigue; a man passed (3) by, and assisted me (4) in saving it. I will (5) learn to swim; and the boatman shall teach me to dive b . (6) He continued lying on the ground, and his friend continued sitting by him. The next morn- (1) May; verb, mogett* Gr. 264. below. (2) The infinitive, after the verbs fyeifiien, fyoren, fyelf en, lefcren, lernen, fehen, fuhletu Gr. 414. 4. (3) To pass by, ttorbetgefyen, a verb compound separable. Gr.319. 1, 2. (4) In saving, to be rendered by the infinitive, without ju Say : assisted me it to save, ^elfen/ to assist, governs the dative case. Me must, there- fore, be mtr* Gr. 428. (5) Say : / will [to~\ swim learn ; the governing infinitive, learn, being last. Gr. 496. at the top of the page. The same in the following : the boatman shall me [_to~] dive teach. (6) Certain verbs, combined with the infinitives of other verbs, create particular phrases. Gr. 417. 5. The first of those verbs is 85(eibcn, to remain, noting continuance of an action. a urn etn Uhr. Sect. VI. 2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 129 ing (1) we took an airing (2) in the carriage, and (3) found him walking* in the park b . We heard that two hours before, he had been (4) riding on horseback ; and he said that he would go home, and lay himself down (5) to sleep. He (6) made us laugh; though he himself (7) did nothing but cry. (8) The desire (9) of becoming rich, brings many men c into poverty ; and the ambition to have d in- (1) Say, took we, the subject after the verb, when an adverbial expression, such as here, next morning, begins the sentence. Gr. 479. 8. (2) To take an airing in a carriage, to drive in a carriage, fpa^teren faftren* Gr. 417. (3) ^inben/ with an infinitive following. Gr. 417. (4) To take an airing on horseback, to ride on horse- back, fpa^ieren rettem Gr. 418. (5) Verb, ftd) legett, to lay one's self down. Gr. 418. (6) Verb, madden, to make. Gr. 418. (7) Verb, thutt, to do. Gr. 418. (8) The infinitive, with the preposition ju before it. Gr. 418. B. (9) The infinitive, with ju, after nouns. Gr.418. B. 1. b t>er ^tergartcn* c SSftenfcfyem ertangem G 5 130 Rules of Grammar. Part I. fluence and power, is frequently the cause (1) of crimes and iniquities. (2) To avoid those snares which the human passions always spread around us, we (3) ought to endeavour (4) to keep our minds in a state of tranquillity and moderation ; and, (5) in order to effect this, (6) the precepts of religion and virtue must be constantly present to our recollection a . (7) When a man once begins (1) Of, Bon. Gr. 395. 1. (2) The infinitive with ju, when purpose and design are intimated. Gr. 418. 2. (3) Ought; verb, muffem Gr. 270. (4) 3u before the infinitive, after the verb endea- vour, which implies purpose. (5) When design and purpose are strongly ex- pressed, the particle lim, in order, is made use of besides ju, and placed at the head of that member of the sentence to which the infinitive belongs. Gr. 418. 2. (6) The subject after the verb, when an infinitive is put at the beginning of the sentence. Gr. 478. 6. Say : must the precepts of the religion and virtue to our . recollection constantly present be. (7) The infinitive, with ju, after certain verbs, ba efcdd&tnijj. Sect. VI. 2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 131 to deviate from (1) rectitude, it is difficult (2) to say where he will cease from sinning. I have in- treated him to alter his course of life a , and even 5 threatened to punish him : but I believe all admo- nition (3) to be of no use c . It appears, therefore, to be (4) wisest, (5) without farther speaking (6) to him, (7)^ to take d the necessary measures (8) of which are mentioned. Gr. 419. 3. Those verbs are here printed in Italics. (1) Say : from the rectitude. Gr. 391. 1. (2) The infinitive, with jit, after a noun adjective. Gr.418. 1. (3) This construction does not suit the German idiom, but must be changed in the manner stated, Gr. 419. at the bottom of the page. (4) Wisest, am wetfefkn* Gr. 195. 5. (5) jDfyne, without, requires the infinitive with u Gr. 419. 4. (6) Say, in German, without farther with him to speak. (7) The infinitive with ju, governed by the pre- ceding adjective, wisest. Gr. 418. 1. (8) Say, him to reason to bring; and see Gr.418. 1. To reason, $u SScrflanbe* ber geben&auf, the course of life. * felbft, fogar* e unnufc, ttergeblicfy* d atwenben/ sep. G 6 132 Rules of Grammar. Parti. bringing him to reason. I do not know (1) how to act otherwise ; (2) in what manner to discharge my duty. (3) We have visited our friends, and taken (4) a view of the country. He had written to his agent % and mentioned (5) that he had received the money. (6) This man was a fool, and remains a fool. It seems a rational thought; but (7) he was called (1) Words, implying an indirect question, such as how, in what manner, do not, in German, bear an infinitive mood after them. Gr. 420. middle. Say, how I otherwise act can. How causes the verb to be last. Gr. 492. (2). (2) Say, in ivhat manner (auf tt)eld)C 2frt) / my duty discharge must. The verb last, according to Gr. 492. (2). (3) One auxiliary serving to two verbs. Gr. 420. (4) To take a view of the country, t>ic CQenb in 2Cnfid)t nefymetu (5) The auxiliary at the end omitted. Gr. 420. below. (6) The verb, governing cases of declensions. The nominative case. Gr. 421. 1. Certain verbs, mentioned Gr.421. /. 1. (7) The nominative case, after verbs passive. Gr. 421. 2. * ber efd)eg* Qrunbe al8 bem23imfd)e,bem Unfd)ulbigenerecfytigfeit nriberfafyren 511 lajfem (2) Say : arrogate I; and refer to Gr. 313. 3. To arrogate to ones self, fid) anmafjten/ reflective verb, with the dative of the reciprocal pronoun, Gr. 425. note* ; 427. ; and the genitive case of the thing, or object, Gr. 424. 4. But it takes the thing, or object, also in the accusative. Gr. 424. 3. 2Cnmaf en is a verb compound separable. (3) Say: this great question to decide. Gr. 418. B. 1. 495. IV. (4) Ought; verb, muffem Gr. 270. Or say, fottte, should. (5) To remember, fid) ertnnew ; reflective verb, with the genitive case. Gr. 424. 4. (6) To be incumbent upon, oblteQCn ; a verb which requires the dative case after it. (7) To make use of, fid) bebicnen, reflective verb, with the genitive case. Gr. 424. 4. 136 Rules of Grammar. Part L use of the rights, which legally belong to us, and not (1) resign those advantages, which our free and happy constitution affords. Who would not (2) be ashamed of an action, which would mark a him as a traitor to the (3) liberties of his country ! (4) I pity 1 ' that miserable creature. (5) Providence has (6) given to man the use of (7) reason, and to the animals different natural faculties, by which both are qualified to fulfil their destiny in the empire of creation d . (1) To resign, fid) bCQeben ; reflective verb, with the genitive case. Gr. 4-24. 4. (2) To be ashamed, fid) fd)dmen ; verb reflective, with the genitive. Gr. 4-24-. 4. (3) Say : towards (QeQClt) liberty in the singular. (4) The impersonal reflective, mid) jammert, with the genitive case. Gr. 424. 4. (5) Verbs, which govern the dative case. Gr. 426. ///. The verbs to be used will be found in the Grammar. Providence, btc SSorfe&UUQ ; with the ar- ticle, according to Gr. 391. 1. (6) ebett, to give; with the dative. Gr. 426. ///. l. To man, t>em fJKenfcben* (7) Say : of the reason. Gr. 391. 1. fcfyimpflid) bejeid)netu b eineS folcfyeru im @tanbe d &a ebiet* Sect. VI. 2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 137 The father (1) commanded the son to (2) relate to the brother the history of that transaction. Some person a who was present b told c me that he did not (3) believe the young man. I (4) an- swered him, that I could (5) allow no one d to (6) doubt his veracity : (7) upon which he (8) begged (1) SSefefylett, to command, with the dative. Gr. 428. 777. 1. (2) @rsdf)len, to relate, dat. Gr. 428. 777. 1. (3) laitben, to believe, to give faith to, dat. Gr. 426. ///. 1. (4) TCntWOrten, to answer, dat. (5) effattett, to permit, to allow; with the dative. Gr.426. ///. 1. (6) To doubt, bejroetfeltt ; a verb transitive, govern- ing the accusative case. Gr. 429. IV. 327. 1. (7) Upon which, trorauf* Gr. 240. 8. (8) To beg pardon for a thing, etWaS abbtttett, verb compound separable, and irregular. Gr. 319., and 288., SSHtetu tfbbttten, literally, is, to beg off; but, in German, it always signifies to beg pardon for a thing. The person of whom pardon is begged stands in the dative, and the thing for which it is begged in the accusative, without a preposition. Gr. 426. at the bottom of the page. a jemanb, some person. b ugecjen 138 Rules of Grammar. Parti. my pardon for the offence ; but 1(1) took from him every future opportunity of affronting me, by (2) announcing to him, that I (3) would (4) excuse his farther visits. At (5) the same time, I (6) ad- vised him to avoid similar a unguarded remarks, (1) Stefymen (irregular verb, Gr. 293.), to take away from, requires the person from which a thing is taken away in the dative ; and the thing which is taken away in the accusative. Gr.426. III. 1. . (2) Ttnjetgen, or anbeitten, to announce, to signify ; verbs compounded with ftn, governing the dative case. Gr. 427. These verbs are separable. Gr. 319. Say: by that (batwrd) baf ) / to him announced. (3) Would, mUte. Gr.265. (4) Say: to him his farther visits excuse would; baf id) mir feine fcrncrcn 23efud)e ttcrbitten rottrbe, or bafj id) ifem feine ferneren 33efud)e erlaffen roollte* (5) At the same time, JltCjleid). (6) Say : disadvised I ; a preposition with its case being at the beginning of the sentence. Gr. 479. 9. SSBiberratfyen, to disadvise, literally takes the dative case of the person, and the accusative of the thing, thus : / disadvised to him similar unguarded remarks. Gr. 427. Sect. VI. '2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 139 (1) telling him, that it did not (2) belong to a stranger, nor (3) was it consistent with prudence and politeness, to (4) follow the impulse a of a mo- men tary b impression, (5) and rashly to declare one's thoughts. The freedom of my censure did not (6) please him; but I (7) flatter no man, when (1) The German language having but a limited use of the participle (Gr. 339. at the bottom of the page), the structure of the sentence must be changed, thus : and told him. To tell, fagett ; with the dative. Gr. 426. ///. 1. (2) 3wfommen/ to belong, that is, in the sense here, to be suitable to. The verb governs the dative. Gr. 428. It is an irregular ; see $ommen, Gr. 292. : and likewise a compound separable. Gr. 319. (3) Say : nor was it consistent with prudence and politeness, baj? ee> ftcfy aud) ntcfyt mit ber ,ftlu<$ett unb oflid)leit sertrage* (4) golgen, to follow; with the dative. (5) Say : and ones thoughts rashly to declare, utlb feinc eftnnungen woreUig ju eroffnen, (6) efaUen, to please; dat. Gr.427- (7) <& before the verb; e bunffe fie* Sect. VI. 2. Agr. and Gov. of the Verb. 141 them as if they found a themselves in another world. It ( 1 ) grieved me to view such a delusion. (2) For this wretched man the spring no longer smiles ; for him nature pours out b her abundance in vain c . To him all is dead, all is inanimate. (3) Love thy (4) neighbour as thyself, is one of the first lessons d of the Christian religion. Do (5) not hate thine enemy, but overcome his aversion 6 by acts of kindness and benevolence ; this is to fight (6) a good fight, to obtain a glorious victory. It is the duty of every father to (7) teach (1) It grieves, e fcfymerftt Gr.428. 3. (2) The dative of advantage or disadvantage. Gr. 429. 4. There is no preposition to be used with that dative. Say : )tefem (Slenbett lacfyelf, (3) Verbs transitive, governing the accusative case. Gr. 429. IV. (4) Neighbour, in this sense, t>er -iftdcfyjle, or bet 9*lebentttenfd) 5 both words of the third declension. (5) Say: hate not. Gr.271.3. (6) A verb neuter, to fight (fdmpfen), converted into a transitive. Gr. 429. (7) Sefyren, to teach, and fyetfert, to bid, to desire, construed with the dative and accusative. Gr. 428. at the bottom of the page. a befmbem b auSfcfyutten, c tiergebenS* d bte 142 Rules of Grammar. Part I. his son the virtues which become* a man, and the duty of every mother to teach her daughter those qualifications 11 which adorn the female sex. To teach a young man (1) to love the sciences, is better than (2) to enrich him with an inheritance. I (3) would not (4) bid the poorest person (5) to do such a thing. (1) After lefyrett, to teach, and lernett, to learn, the infinitive may be used, without ju/ or with it Gr. 416. 4. Here, it will be best to employ ju ; because leftten itself is in the infinitive, and the insertion of Jit will break the monotonous and close reiteration of the same endings. If ju is omitted, the infinitive governed must be put before that which does govern, thus : a young man the sciences to love teach. Gr. 496. middle. But with ju, the sentence may be divided into two members, thus : a young man teach infinitive without ju/ Gr. 416. 2. the sciences to love, which method is certainly, in this in- stance, more agreeable to the ear than the other. (2) The infinitive without ju Gr. 416. (3) Would, WoEte* See SSolIen, Gr. 265. (4) To bid, tyeifj en ; with the dative, or accusative. Gr. 428. (5) Do may be left out, in German, and the sen- tence thus construed: / would the poorest person (SD^enfd)) such a thing (fo etwaS) not bid. Gr. 428. a gcjtemen, dat. b (Stcjenfcfyaft, f. Sect. VI. 3. Ayr. $ Gov. of the Prep. Inter. 143 3. Agreement and Government of the Prepo- sition and Interjection.* (1) With the constancy, (2) resolution, and heroism of a great and experienced warrior, he extricated himself (3) from the difficulties*, and dangers which, on all sides b , surrounded him. * On the subjects of this paragraph little is to be said. See Gr. 43 1,432. (1) When a preposition governs more nouns than one, it is sufficient to put it before the first. Gr. 431. (2) The article need not be repeated, when a noun following is of the same number and gender as the one which preceded ; which observation applies here, (Stanbfyafttgfett, constancy, and (tttfd)loj]enl)ett, re- solution, both being of the feminine gender. But when there is a difference, either in the number or the gender, the article must again be expressed. ^)dben* miltft, heroism, being a masculine, requires its own article. Gr.391. 10. (3) Say : he extricated himself, &c. jog Ct ft'cf) aitS ben SSerlegenfyeiten itnb efafirem bie SSerfegenfyeit, b auf alien eitem 144 Rules of Grammar. Part I. (1) Oh ! wretched man that I am ! (2) Ah ! (3) what a dreadful situation ! Alas ! (4) for the me- lancholy prospect ! Fie (2) upon that cruel friend ! Happy (5) he, who never endured* such a mis- fortune ! But (6) woe to the villain who has ruined me ! O ! (7) unfortunate me ! (1) Cases after interjections. First, the nomina- tive. Gr.4-31. (2) Germanice, Oh ! I wretched man. (3) What a, wa fit* ettl. Gr. 239. 7. (4-) The genitive case after interjections, without a preposition. Gr. 432. (5) Happy, to be expressed by roofyl/ with the dative following. Gr. 4-32. (6) Woe, wefye, with the dative. (7) The accusative after the interjection. Gr. 432. erldbem Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and PhraseoL 145 SECTION VII. ON SOME PECULIARITIES IN CONSTRUCTION AND PHRASEOLOGY.* (1) In the evening (2) he was wont a to entertain his friends b by the (3) reading of useful and in- structive books ; and he rose c early in the morning, to perform the duties of his office d . Three times 6 in the year, he quitted his home, and visited dis- tant parts f . (4) Unfortunately, I was absent when * This chapter begins, in the Grammar, p. 433. ; but the first portions, concerning the composition of words, and on purism, are not calculated for our purpose. We therefore proceed with the exercises, from p. 449. to 469. (1) Use of the genitive case. Gr. 449. It ex- presses relation of time, as here : in the evening, in the morning, in the year. (2) Say : was he wont. For when any case of a noun, not being the subject nominative, begins a sen- tence, the subject must be after the verb. Gr. 479. 8. (3) This must be rendered by ba$> 2efen See Ex- ercises, p. 78. note 8. (4) The genitive also marks way and manner. Gr. a pflegen, to be wont. b mtt, dat. c d ba 2Cmt c breimaU f ba 2anb, pi. gdnber, H 146 Rules of Grammar. Part I. he came to a the town where I live b . I followed him, with ( 1 ) an intention to see him ; but was ob- liged to return, (2) without having effected that end. (3) The fourth day after his departure from hence, he arrived (4) at his brother's, and stayed a whole month. (5) The family were alarmed by the loud voci- feration which burst in (6) upon them from the 450. 3. For unfortunately, say, in an unfortunate manner ; the genitive case ; in German, imglttcfltcfyer SBeifc. (1) Say -.from the intention, in or Ct 2(bffd)t (2) Without having effected that end, UtWemcbteter @ad)e This is likewise an absolute genitive case, used with an adverbial power. It is the Latin re infectd. (3) Use of the accusative, denoting time. Gr.451. (4-) At is here the French chez, bet : with the dative. See Exercises, p. 83. note 5. (5) Nouns singular require, in German, the verb strictly in the same number, though their meaning should imply plurality ; as, family, people. Gr. 4-53. above. Say, therefore, the family was alarmed ; the English people does not brook. (6) Say : upon it, referring to family, a noun singular. To burst in, eiubrtngen, or fyeretnfcringen, verb compound separable, and irregular. Gr. 319. 288. Upon here to be rendered by u, prep. dat. narf) b roohne. c bleiben (bafelbft)* Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and Phraseol. 147 street. The English people a do not brook b a harsh and oppressive treatment. ( 1 ) It was a servant of ours whom you saw in the room. A friend of mine came the other day c , and fell d into the same error. ('2) How did you sleep last night ? I am afraid 6 I shall pass this night in considerable f pain. (3) Whoever the defendant may be, (4) justice must be done 5 : and whatever the punishment may be, he must submit 11 to (5) it. (6) Some twenty years (7) ago, (8) one (9) could (1) Use of the possessive pronouns. Gr. 454. (2) The pronoun biefer, btefe, biefeS. Gr. 455. (3) The relative pronoun, with certain additions, to express whoever or whosoever, and whatever or whatsoever. Gr. 455. above. May be fet), or fepn mag* (4) Say: the Justice; Gr.391. 1. (5) The demonstrative pronoun to be employed for it, bemfelben* Gr. 402. 3. Exercises, p. 1 1 2. note 4. (6) (Simge, etltcfye. See Gr. 455. (7) Ago, ttor : prep. dat. Gr. 372. above. (8) One, man. Gr.241.2. (9) Verb ? omtetu Gr. 268. a baS SSoif "not a, f etm c fcor em d tterfallem e befttrcfyten* f f)ef% g werben* h ftct) unterwerfetu H 2 148 Rules of Grammar. Parti. buy the same articles 3 for (1) half the money. It will now require some thousand pounds, to furnish every thing b that is necessaiy. When the judge arrived, he (2) caused all the delinquents to be brought before him : he absolved c most of them ; but three he (2) ordered to be executed 11 . It is my uncle, who (3) causes these roads to be repaired 6 . There is nothing farther (4) to be done in this matter f . It is (5) to be feared, that the enterprise will totally miscarry s . (1) Say : the half money, according to Gr. 393. 4. (2) The infinitive of the active voice is used after certain verbs, where, in English, the passive would be required. Gr. 457. Refer likewise to 34-3. One of those verbs is laffen, which signifies, in this sense, to cause, to order to be done. The German, therefore, literally will be, he caused [or rather, caused ke~] the delinquents before him bring, but three ordered he to execute. (3) Say : who these roads to repair causes ; and see the preceding note. (4) Say : to do. See Gr. 457. Compare 343. (5) Say: to fear. a bie acfye, b afleS, every thing, c loSfprecben, comp. irr. sep. d hinricfyten. e aitSbefTerm f acfye. miflingetu Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and Phraseol. 149 (1 ) I ought to have written to a my friend, but I have been obliged to omit it. Had I been able to spare some moments, I should have been will- (1) The infinitive, in certain verbs, is substituted for the preterite participle, when an infinitive precedes. Gr. 457. The words liable to that peculiarity are bitvfen, follen, fonnen, mogen, laffen, miiffen, roolien, fyorert, fefyen. ' In some of them, a difficulty will be experienced with regard to their construction being rendered intelligible to the beginner. The nature of the English language does not furnish, in the instances alluded to, the advantage of a literal trans- lation, inasmuch as the corresponding verbs, in English, are destitute of the infinitive mood and preterite participle ; I mean the verbs shall, will, must, can, may. Let us consider the first example : / ought to have written. The structure of the words is framed very differently in English from what it is in German. By the latter, the idea ought is embodied in the preterite QefoIIt, as if it were / had ought, as in French jaurois du. But a preterite participle of the verb ought is unknown to the English language, whereas the German has it in gefollt, French du. $d) fydtte gefollt, Latin, debuissem. Now this preterite participle, Qefollt, is changed into the infinitive folkn, because it stands before the infinitive fd)mben, write. J'aurois du ecrire, debuissem scribere; and the sentence a an, to, prep, ace, H 3 ] 50 Rules of Grammar. Part I. ing to do it. You have (1) heard it said, but we have never (2) seen it done. Though he had consequently appears thus : ^d) fydtte dtt meitten teunb fd)retben follen* The next example, / have been obliged to omit it, is more tractable, because we have got rid of the English verb must, which, like ought, affords us neither an infinitive nor a preterite participle. To be obliged is muffen ;. the preterite participle, gemttfjt, I have been obliged, id) fyabe Qemuf? t The pret. part, gewufjt is turned into the infinitive muffen/ on account of an infinitive preceding, to omit it- 5$ fyflbe c6 imterlaffen mufferu In a similar manner the following may be analysed : Had I been able to spare some moments, where again we have fortunately disengaged ourselves from the English verb can. To be able, fottneru Had I been able, fydtte id) Qef onnt Had 1 been able to spare some moments, fydtte id) etntge 2(ugenbltcfe abmujjtgen fonnen (for gefomtt). The remaining examples will now appear easy. To be willing, wolleru / should have been willing, id) fydtte QCttMt ; before an infinitive, id) fydttC WOlien* I should have been willing to do it, fo (a subsequent member, Gr. 480. 12.) fydtte id) e tfwn roollem (1) This must be, in German, you have it say heard. @d$en, say (instead of said), is the infini- tive, which, being placed before the participle Qefyort, heard, converts this likewise into the infinitive, fyorem (2) We have it never do seen. The participle Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and Phraseol. 151 (1) got the advertisement* drawn up b , yet he has not (2) dared to publish it. I should (3) like to have seen it. He began his speech (4) without knowing (5) how to proceed; and ended it, without reflecting c seen, following the infinitive tfylltt, do, is transformed into the infinitive febett* (1) To get a thing done, to cause it to be done, is ex- pressed by faffen* Say here : Though he the advertise- ment had draw up let. He had got, et fyfltte QClflffCtt* The participle, after an infinitive, becomes faffem When the auxiliary verb is affected by a conjunction, which ought, in ordinary circumstances, to bring that verb to the end, it will stand before the first infinitive, when the preterite participle is also changed into the infinitive. This happens in the present example, after the conjunction though. jDbgletd) er fete 2Cttfunt>t* gitng fyatte auffefcen laffen* (2) Dared, part, geburft ; to be turned into the infinitive butfett. @0 (subsequent member, Gr. 480. 12.) hat er fte bod) nicfyt j^elannt macfyen bttrfen, (3) To like, mogen. (Gr. 457.) Say : ^d) tydtte -<0 fefjett mogen, / should have it see like. (4) The preposition ofyne, followed by the infinitive, with ju, Gr. 419. 4. 458. Ex. p. 131. note 5. (5) Say : how he should proceed, or ought to pro- ceed. Gr.420. Ex. p. 132. notes 1 and 2. b cntwerfen/ auffet&em c bebcnfetu H 4 152 Rules of Grammar. Part L what a injury b he had, by his folly, inflicted (1) upon the common cause. Make* room ! Empty d the glass. That may, (2) perhaps, be true ; but, neverthe- less, I think 6 that some caution is necessary. You probably recollect the circumstance, which oc- curred a little while ago f ; and I should, (3) indeed, like to hear 5 in what manner it may be explained. (4) Pray, will you reach me that book ? I can read this print very (5) well. My father finds h himself, (0 3wfltQCn/ to inflict upon, verb compound sepa- rable, construed with the dative case, without a pre- position. The common cause, t>te gemetnfcfyaftltche * The preterite participle for the imperative. Gr. 459. (2) The expletive ttJO&l, according to Gr. 459. It has already been noticed, Ex. p. 94. notes 6. 9. (3) I should, indeed, like, id) mod)te n?of)l* Gr. 460. (4) Pray is here to be rendered by tt>obl Pray, will you, woUen @te roofyl ? (5) Well is often expressed by gut, especially when there might be a chance of confounding the expletive character of roofyl, with its positive significa- tion. Gr. 460. When, however, it is accompanied by any adverb, such as very, perfectly, sufficiently a waS fur ein, or, welcfyer. b ber cfyabe, 9tacb, tfeeil, c sptofe* d leeren, auStrinfem e glauben* f oor fur* jcm. crfaferen* h befinbem Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and Phraseol 153 at present, perfectly (1) well. What a person (2) likes to do commonly succeeds ; but it is other- wise (3) with every thing which one (4) dislikes to (5) engage in. I (6) likebetter to read the simple* narrative of real events, than the most entertain- ing fiction. He likes best to (7) play at cards; indeed, he is much b addicted to play (8). His father does not (9) like it: he likes music better. distinct to declare the intended meaning, ttJOfyl may be used with equal propriety. (1) In the question of health, well is usually ex- pressed by WOhl* Perfectly well, gatlj TOOfyl. (2) The idea to like, rendered by the adverb gertU Gr. 460. A person, jemanb, or etner, (3) It is otherwise, e Verhalt fid) attberS. Every thing, alle6* (4) To dislike ; the adverb geW, with a negative : nicfyt getn, or imgtnu One, man (5) To engage in, fid) mtt etwaS befaffetl* Say : whereivith one not willingly engages. (6) The idea to like, in the comparative degree, expressed by lieber* Gr. 460. (7) Say : er fpielt Garten am liebflen. The idea to like, in the superlative degree. Gr.460. (8) Say : bem a, or bort, to fytn : as fyierfyer ; babtn, or borthtn* (2) 5a, with prepositions. Gr. 461. (3) 250$, as an expletive. Gr. 462. It is to be used for all those expressions in the text which are printed in Italics. It is placed, like an adverb, always after the verb. (4) 3a, in an expletive capacity. Gr. 462. It will answer to all those words in the text which are in Italics. Its position is after the verb. Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and Phraseol. 155 Truly, he does nothing. / see you are sleepy. (1) Pray, stay; I assure you it is yet very early. Will you ? (2) Yes, certainly. (3) On no account mention that circumstance, and (4) never discover the secret. He passed a the remaining years of his life (5) in the midst of his friends ; but he (6) still retained a predilection for the active occupations b of a soldier. (7) One c person is perhaps not so cheerful d as (1) Pray, t>ocfy See last note but one. (2) Yes, certainly, ja WofyL Gr. 462. below. (3) On no account, ja ntcfyt* %$& f joined to a nega- tive, enforces the negative idea. Gr. 462. below. The negative particle commonly stands after the object ; ja immediately follows the verb ; as in this example : ewdhnen te ; than by a jubnngcn, fyinbringem b t>er tfyattge 33eruf, sing. c SSftenfcfy. d munter/ aufgeraumt, better* H 6 156 Rules of Grammar. Part I. another, but he may 8 be more affectionate b and feeling . The society of my friend is, in every respect, as valuable as the instruction of a teacher. He is as learned as (1) most of his cotemporaries. We have nothing more to expect, (2) but a con- firmation of the accounts which we have already received. It is (3) two months (4) since my brother has written ; but it is above a year (5) since we have flB Gr. 4-63. When the comparison of equality is to be strong, and pointed, the word eben may be put before fo, as in the text : as valuable as the instruction of a teacher, eben fo fcfya^bar, al3* (1) Say : the most. Gr. 392. 2. (2) But is to be expressed by rtl3, when it is synonymous with than. Gr. 463. (3) In German, It are two months, for it is two months. Gr. 223. 5. Exerc. p. 43. note 3. (4) Since, when involving a negative idea, is, in German, accompanied by the negative particle. Gr. 464. Say : since my brother has not written. (5) When there is, in the sentence, a substantive to which the negative idea may be attached, the nega- tive adjective fctn is usually recurred to, instead of the negative participle, as in this example : since we no intelligence have obtained. fann. jdrtlicfy, Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Constr. and Phraseol 157 obtained intelligence from the (1) East Indies. (2) How often have I warned that thoughtless man ! How modest and rational did he appear, when I spoke to him ! (3) There were about twenty ships in the har- bour, and thirty at sea. I believe the whole force consisted of nearly four thousand men. They marched (4) from two to three days without fresh provisions. (5) I think a (6) it was on (7) Friday, that he (1) The East Indies, )f!inbtett ; without the article. (2) The negative inserted in interrogative excla- mations. How often have I not warned that thought- less man ! How modest and rational did lie not ap- pear ! Gr. 464. middle. (3) The idea about, nearly. Gr. 465. (4) 3roei bis brei Sage, (5) The conjunctions bafj/ that, and wetttt, if, omitted. Gr. 466. (6) Here baf is understood. The verb stands in the indicative mood. Sometimes the subjunctive is required. Gr. 413. 2. The subjunctive mood is always used, with the latent idea of doubt and uncertainty ; but this notion is generally discarded, when we speak of ourselves. Gr.411. 1. (7) Say : on the Friday ; and contract the prepo- a glauben* 158 Rules of Grammar. Parti. came to me. You say (1) it was (2) on Thursday. (3) If he come again to my house, (4) I shall re- quest him to speak (5) to the attorney. (6) If I had the power of granting his request, I would do it. He will not believe (7) that it depends upon any other man ; (8) but persuades himself, (9) that I can accomplish his wish at pleasure*. sition an with the article into am : am grettage* See Exerc. p. 86. note 5. (1) 2)afj is again understood, and the subjunctive mood will be proper, according to Gr. 413. 2. (2) Say : on the Thursday ; am )enn, and say : Comes he again to me. Gr. 466. 483. 13. (4) Subsequent member. Gr. 480. 12. (5) Say : with the attorney to speak. (6) Leave out the conjunction if, and say : Had I the power. The verb had must be put in the subjunc- tive mood, because the sentence corresponds with a conditional future. See Exerc. p. 122. note 1. (7) That may be omitted ; the verb being put in the subjunctive mood, according to Gr. 413. 2. (8) But^ when a negative precedes, is expressed by fonbern* Gr. 468. Compare Exerc. p. 91. note 5. (9) That may again be omitted ; verb in the sub- junctive mood. a na<$ efaflem Sect. VII. Peculiar, in Comtr. and Phraseol. 159 There stood the unfortunate woman, (1) her eyes being directed to the ship, which (2) carried away her beloved husband. These causes being presupposed % (3) one must naturally expect similar consequences : but that important circumstance being" set aside, (3) the whole subject assumes* 1 a different shape 6 . (1) The absolute accusative case, with the preterite participle. Gr. 468. In English the participle of the auxiliary is made use of, but that is not required in German. (2) To carry away, battOtttragett ; verb compound separable. Gr. 315. El. 96. (3) When absolute cases begin the sentence, the subject nominative finds its place after the verb. Gr. 479. 8. Say therefore: must one; assumes the whole subject. b ait bent SBege rdumen* c tie d annehmen, irr. sep. e eine anbere ejfalt, em anbereS TCnfefoen* 160 Rules of Grammar. Parti. SECTION VIII. ON THE ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 1 1. Position of the Noun Substantive.* (1) The boy does his duty. (2) Does the man do the same ? (3) Men love honour and glory, but (1) The Noun Substantive, as the subject, before the verb. Gr. 475. /. The definition of what is meant by subject and object is given in that place. (2) The subject after the verb in direct questions. Gr.476. 1. (3) The subject after the verb when the objective case is, for the purpose of emphasis, placed in the beginning of the sentence. Say : Honour and glory love men; and see Gr. 476. 2. Men, t>ie SKenfc^en* * Gr. 475 487. 1 Gr. 470 507. The nature and importance of this subject are explained and enforced in the begin- ning of the third chapter, in the second part of the Grammar. To succeed in composition, it is of the utmost consequence that the student should be duly impressed with the remarks which are made in that place. He is, therefore, earnestly desired to read the passage alluded to with great attention, and sub- Sect. Fill. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 161 (1) a few only pursue them rightly. (2) To the Christian this world is a theatre for the exercise of his virtues. (3) Bright was his countenance, and (3) white were his garments a . (4) Happy do mankind call sequently to observe, with diligence, the rules of posi- tion to which the following exercises will be directed. Many, and perhaps most, of those rules, if not all, have already been pointed out and practised in the exercises which precede ; but it is impossible to render them too familiar. They ought thoroughly to insinuate themselves, if I may say so, into the feeling and perception of persons who would speak or write Ger- man with propriety. In the present section, the rules are applied in the order in which they occur in the Grammar. (1) SBentQC, a few, does not admit the indefinite article before it. Gr. 394-. above. (2) The subject after the verb when the dative case of person commences the sentence. Gr. 477. 3. (3) The subject after the verb when an adjective or pronoun, serving for, or belonging to, the object, is put at the beginning of the sentence. Gr. 477. 4. In the two first examples, the adjectives bright and white serve for the object. (4) The adjective happy belongs to the object, foaS eroanb, sing. 162 Rules of Grammar. Parti. that man who possesses wealth and power; but very different does such a man often find his real situation. (1) Mine was the privilege, but his was the honour. (2) A messenger came, and told the fatal story. A vehement lamentation spread itself through the city. (3) The steward will not write ; but he pro- mises that he will speak with the lord (4) of the manor. (5) In order to secure the victory, a general must employ all his talents and all his diligence. which follows, viz. that man ; the adjective, very dif- ferent, to the object, his rear situation. For does find, say finds. Subject after the verb. (1) A pronoun, serving for the object, here begins the sentence. The subject, consequently, stands after the verb. Gr. 477. 4. (2) Begin the sentence with @S Gr. 403. 4. ; the subject after the verb. Gr. 478. 5. (3) Place the infinitive write,in the beginning, which brings the subject after the verb. Gr. 478. 6. (4) The lord of the manor, bet UtSfyerr* (5) An infinitive constitutes, here, the prior mem- ber of the sentence ; in consequence of which, the subject must, in the member which follows, stand after the verb : must a general, fyc. Gr. 478. 6. In Sect. Fill. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 163 (1) Trembling, awaited the son the approach of his father; weeping, tried the mother to en- courage a him. The hero slept solemnly b into the hall. (2) Instantly the warriors arose, and saluted him. The servants hastened (3) quickly to do (4) him honour; but (5) unfortunately the lord order to, um JtU Gr. 418. 2. Um is put quite in the beginning, the infinitive last, and ju immediately be- fore it, thus : for (itttt) the victory to secure. (1) The subject after the verb, when a participle adverbially begins the sentence. Gr. 478. 7- (2) The subject after the verb, when an adverb is placed in the beginning. Say here: Solemnly stept the hero. Gr. 479. 8. (3) Commence the sentence with the word quickly, which may be rendered by the adverb fd)tteU ; or by the adverbial genitive (see Gr. 450. 3.), ftehenben ^Uf e The subject comes, in either way, after the verb. Gr. 479. 8. (4) 2Cntfiun, comp. sep., or erwetfen, comp. ins., both construed with the dative case of person. (5) Unfortunately, un^U(!lid}er SKeife, The sub- ject after the verb. einfpred)en, ermitthigen. b feterlid)* 164 Eules of Grammar. Parti. of the castle was absent. ( 1 ) In the evening, the bells were wont to ring ; and in the morning, the thunder of the artillery a re-echoed from the walls. (2) The army b retreated with the greatest order; and, in full reliance on c the courage of his soldiers, the general determined to give battle d if it should be necessary. (3) Then, the difficulty ceased; for that reason, the war was undertaken ; never- theless, care is requisite to restore the former prosperity; consequently, government acts pro- perly 6 (4) in restraining f every abuse. The father (1) )e 2bent>3, be3 SftorgenS, genitive cases. Gr. 4-51. 1. Subject after the verb. Gr. 4-79. 8. Say : were the bells generally rung: ttWVben t>te locfen geroohnltd) gdautet. (2) The subject after the verb, when a preposition, with its case, begins the sentence. Gr. 479. 9. (3) The subject after the verb, when certain con- junctions are in the beginning. Gr. 479. 10. Those made use of here will be found in the Grammar in the passage just quoted. (4) Say : in that (barttt t>a ) in every abuse re- strains. c auf. d etne Iteferm e ^roeifmajjtg. f fteuern. dat. Sect. Fill. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 165 (1) also says it : the mother confirms it also. The son, indeed, denies it ; but either the story is per- fectly true, or entirely false. (2) " Arise, and go," said the king. " I obey thy commands, O king," replied the sage. He (3) then went away. When he came into the city, (4) a multitude* of (1) The conjunctions aildb, also ; cnttt)eber/ either ; indeed, sometimes require the subject to be placed after the verb. Under what modification they produce that effect, see Gr. 480. middle. But these conjunctions themselves may be placed after the verb. Gr. 506. IV. (2) When, in quotations, the subject is placed after the verbs said, replied, answered, and the like, some of the words quoted precede. Gr. 480. 11. (3) Then, baraitf* This particle may either be put in the beginning of the sentence, in which situation it causes the subject to be after the verb (Gr. 479. 10.), or it may itself be placed after the verb (Gr. 505. ///.). (4) This is the subsequent member of the sentence, in which the subject must follow the verb. Gr. 480. 12. Say : met him a multitude of people. The ante- cedent member here begins with when. SSolfeS* 166 Rules of Grammar. Parti. people met him ; he stopped*, and after he had en- quired 15 into the causes of this concourse, (1) the man continued his way. As soon as he had reached the house which he sought, (2) a woman came out c , and spoke thus : Since I have last seen thee, (3) wretchedness has overwhelmed me. If thou wilt hear the tale of my woe (4) thy heart will melt d with pity. Were I not conscious (5) of my innocence, (6) the treasures of the world should not move me (1) The subsequent member, the subject after the verb ; continued the man, the antecedent beginning with the conjunction after. (2) Again the subsequent member ; antecedent, As soon as. (3) Subsequent member ; antecedent, since. (4) When the antecedent member begins with the conjunction if, the subsequent member is marked with the particle fo, so. Gr. 482. middle. Compare Gr. 380. and 467. (5) See Ex. p. 106. note 6. (6) @0 must always be in the subsequent member; when in the antecedent, the conjunction if is to be understood. For example, in this sentence : toere I not conscious, that conjunction is evidently to be sup- plied : if I were not conscious. Gr. 467. ; and 482. below. a j!iE fteben, jleben bletben, fatten, anfyalten* b fra* gett, fid) erfimbtgen, construed with the preposition nad), and the dative case. c fyerauS* d erfd)meljen. Sect. Fill. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 167 to appear before thee. When she had thus given vent a to her grief, and recovered, in some measure 1 *, her tranquillity, (1) the old man exhorted her to resign herself to the necessity of fate d . What thou hast now suffered, said he, (2) futurity will com- (1) After consecutive conjunctions, when, as, and the like, the subsequent member very frequently has fo, especially when the antecedent is of some length. The personal pronouns, in the oblique cases, such as me, thee, him, her, it, us, you, them, are generally, in a subsequent member, placed before the subject, if this be not also a personal pronoun. For instance, here : exhorted her the old man. The old man, t>er VCtS* (2) The subsequent member, formed by an antece- dent relative pronoun. Gr. 481. note. When the antecedent is constituted by a relative pronoun, or relative adverb, the subsequent member never can take the particle fo* The reason is this. In every subsequent member there should be, and, perhaps, originally was, a connecting term, bearing reference to the antecedent. The particle fo is of that descrip- tion, which, in many instances, is now made use of. a guft oerfcfyaffen, freien gauf laffetu b etnicjer* maeiu c ftd) ergeben, fid) imtewerfen, both con- strued with the dative ; fid) fuQett, construed with in/ and the accusative. < ba$ SMttere ^ efd)icf$* 168 Rules of Grammar. Part I. pensate. Where hope remains % (1) evils may be mended; but where that resource b fails, the in- jury is irreparable* 1 . Because thou hast suffered undeservedly 6 , (2) the consciousness of thy virtue will uphold thee f . To a relative pronoun, the correspondent word is a pronoun demonstrative, in this manner : What thou hast now suffered, that will futurity compensate, After a relative adverb, the corresponding term ought to be a demonstrative adverb, thus : " Where hope remains, there may evils mended be." These corre- spondent words are to be understood, and exclude the use of fo Say, the futurity, according to Gr. 391. 1. (1) The subsequent member, after a relative ad- verb. Gr. 481. note. (2) The subsequent member, after a casual con- junction, because. Here fo may generally be ad- mitted. The peculiar nature of a subsequent member is, that it requires the subject nominative to stand after the verb ; and although every subsequent member ought to have a corresponding term to connect it with the antecedent, yet that term is not always expressed, but, in many instances, understood. a no tfyetl, ber cfyabem d utmrbeJTerlicfy, unerfefelid). e imuerbi enter SBeife, f aufrecfyt fyattem Sect. VIII. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 169 (1) Had success rewarded a his enterprise, the tongues of the world would have resounded in his praise b . Were victory the theme of con- versation , the countenance of this man would be different. It exists in the particle fo The words je and in comparative sentences (Gr. 378, 379.), may be considered in the same light. The corresponding term is at the head of the sentence ; and in that position, whether the term be an objective case, such as the pronoun ba (Gr. 476. 2.), or an adverb (Gr. 479. 8.), or a conjunction (Gr. 479. 10.), it must force the subject from its original place. The subject, when dislodged from the beginning of the sentence, which is its natural position, is always placed after the verb. Gr. 481. As to the particle fo, the latent sense of it may, in different situations, be differently analysed and interpreted. It may be equivalent to then, at that time, under those circumstances, in that case, on that condition, on that supposition. Its practical application in the subsequent member is that which the exercises have illustrated. (1) The subject after the verb, when the conjunc- tion if is to be supplied. The verb then begins the sentence. It is the same in English. Gr. 483. 13. * fronen* b ju feinem 8obe, in his praise. < bf Untembung* i 170 Rules of Grammar. Part I. (1) The world despises (2) a man who forgets (3) the dignity of his condition : but (4) a fool, who designedly degrades himself, no one can sufficiently detest. (5) When the conqueror had reached the summit of his glory, he began to perceive (1) The substantive, being the object, stands after the verb. Gr. 484. //. Concerning the object, see the explanation, p. 475. The object is always go- verned by the verb, and, accordingly, to be put in some particular case. After transitive verbs, it is the accusative ; and as these are most frequent, the accusative may be particularly considered as an ob- jective case. There are, however, verbs which govern other cases (Gr. 421. and the following pages); and these cases equally constitute the object. (2) A man is the object. (5) The dignity is the object; but the verb which governs it is by the relative pronoun forced to the end, so that the object must necessarily have its place before the verb. Gr. 484. //. Exception 2. (4) A fool, the object, is here, for the sake of emphasis, to be placed in the beginning of the sen- tence. Gr. 484. //. Exception 1. (5) The verb is brought to the end by the con- junction bit, ichen ; consequently, the object cannot stand after the verb. Gr. 484. //. Exception 2. The object, here, is, the summit, fyc. Sect. VIII. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 171 (1) the vanity a of all human greatness. Every creature enjoys (2) life : but a Christian rejoices in (3) the hope of a future existence. (4) The love of his subjects is (5) the king's greatest strength. The virtue of modesty is the youth's best ornament. He was (6) worthy of the honour ; but not (7) in want of the money, which (1) The vanity is the object, governed by the verb perceive ; which verb, being in the infinitive, goes to the end : the object, therefore, must be before it. (2) The verb genief en, to enjoy, may govern the genitive case (Gr. 424. 3.) ; that case may, therefore, here form the object. Let it stand at the beginning of the sentence, according to Gr. 484. //. 1., thus: of the life enjoys every creature. (3) let) freuen, to rejoice in, reflective verb, governs the genitive case. Gr. 424. 4. Say : of the hope, genitive, which is the object. (4) Position of the genitive case, not being the object. Gr. 484. ///. (5} The genitive before the substantive which governs it. Gr. 484. ///. 1. (6) The genitive before the adjective by which it is governed. Gr. 484. III. 2. ; 398. ///. 1. (7) SSebutfttg, in want, an adjective. Gr. 398. ///. 1. i 2 172 Rules of Grammar. Parti. constituted* 1 the reward. I am (1) certain of this truth, that a person b who is unmindful of his duty is not capable of such a charge . (2) For the sake of money, many crimes are committed. (3) Posterity shows honour to the man who has faithfully served his country. (4) Mankind always pay regard to real /merit: (5) prejudice often refuses its approbation to discoverers and inventors; but time generally compensates the (1) Adjectives with the genitive case. Gr. 398. ///. i. Unmindful, imetngebenf* (2) The genitive case before some prepositions. Gr. 485. 3. For the sake of, hfllben* Gr. 356. (3) The dative, as a case of person, has its place after the verb, and before the object. Gr. 485. IV. Say : The posterity, bte 9 f lad)tt>elt / according to Gr. 391. 1. (4) Mankind, t>te SSftettfcfyett, plur. When the case of person is to be marked with an emphasis, it must be moved from its place, either before the verb, or after the object. 'The former is the more effectual. It may be applied here : To real merit pay mankind always regard. Gr. 476. 2. (5) Say: the prejudice ; according to Gr. 391. 1. Here, for the purpose of laying some stress upon the jemanb* c t>a eftydft* Sect. Fill. 1. Posit, of Words. Substant. 173 injustice. (1) He addicts himself to the gaming a table. I recommend him to amend. (2) The world calls every person a friend, who willingly 15 renders the common offices' 1 of social life. We denominate the man a philosopher. A good father teaches (3) his son the principles of religion. (4) After the judge had announced dative cases, discoverers and inventors, let them stand after the object. See the foregoing note. It must be to the discoverers, according to Gr. 391. 1. So afterwards, the time. (1) When the object consists in a small mono- syllabic word, such as an oblique case of a personal or reciprocal pronoun, it is always put before the dative of person ; and it is remarkable that this is done, even when that dative is itself of no greater extent, but also proceeding from a personal or reci- procal pronoun. Gr. 485. (2) The accusative of person before the object, under the same modifications as the dative. Gr. 486. V. Person, Sftenfrf), (3) The accusative of person after the verb geljren, to teach. Gr. 486. V. (4) The subject, case of person, and object, meet- ing before the verb (Gr.486. middle), because the conjunction after removes the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). c letfletu d bie i 3 1 74 Rules of Grammar. Part L the sentence to the delinquent, (1) the captain gave orders (2) to the soldiers, to carry him back to prison. Exercise a is (3) conducive to health, and conse- quently (4) of service to the mind b . (5) The apart- ment is twenty feet long, and sixteen feet broad. (6) Boy, come hither; go away, child. John c , bring me the book ; fetch my hat, William d . (1) The subject, case of person, and object, meeting after the verb (Gr. 486.), because the verb always begins the subsequent member of a sentence. Gr. 480. 12. (2) Say: the order, ben JBefetyL (3) The dative case, when governed by an adjec- tive (Gr. 399. 2.), stands before the same. It is, indeed, the same with all cases that are governed by adjectives. Gr.486. VI. 485. IV. Conducive, ju* (4) Of service, bienltd), adjective with the dative. Gr.401. 2. above. (5) The accusative, governed by an adjective (Gr. 399. 3.), stands likewise before it. See note (3), (6) The vocative case may have its place in any part of the sentence, where the will of the speaker or writer chooses to fix it. Gr. 487. VII. a bte SSeroegung, b bcr eifh Sect. Fill. 2. Posit, of Words. Adj.SfPr. 175 2. Position of the Noun Adjective and the Pronoun* (1) Sincere friendship is a great treasure to the happy man who possesses it. The youth a , (2) wise, good, and valiant, resisted both (3) the temptations and menaces with which he was as- sailed b . The climate is (4) warm ; but the situation of the place is inconvenient* 1 . The house, indeed, is (5) spacious, but not pleasant. (6) There are * Gr. 487. 489. (1) The adjective stands before the substantive to which it is joined. Gr. 487. /. (2) The adjective, when in apposition to the sub- stantive, is put after it. Gr. 487. middle. (3) Both and, fo nwfyl al3 aucfy* See Exerc. p. 91. note (1) ; p. 91. note (2). (4) The adjective, serving for the object, after the verb. Gr. 489. //. (5) The adjective may, with an emphasis, be placed at the beginning of the sentence, thus : Spacious is the house. Gr. 487. //. Indeed, tt>ar. See Exerc. p. 94. note (9) ; and p. 95. note (1). (6) The numerals stand before other adjectives. Gr.487. ///. ber SfincjHna* b bejKtrmen* c ber SDrt* d im unbequem* i 4 176 Rules of Grammar. Parti. four large apartments in every story. The (1) first three are in a good condition, the five others very bad. (2) Several weighty reasons, besides all the unpleasant circumstances which we have men- tioned, would induce many wise people to give up (3) such a property. All (4) the four witnesses have confirmed the fact. (5) The thing is not worth (6) the trouble. (1) Cardinal and ordinal numbers meeting before a substantive, it seems indifferent, "whether the cardi- nals or ordinals are put first. Gr. 488. at the top of the page. (2) The adjectives, bte anbern, and bte le^ten, when joined with cardinal numbers, may be treated upon the same principle as ordinals. Perhaps, all super- latives may be included in the observation. (3) The words, die/ mand)C, titele, find their places before numerals and other adjectives. Gr. 4-88. middle. (4) Such a, em foldjeS* Gr. 393. Property, ba (i:tgenthimu (5) The article need not be put after the word afle* Gr. 400. 2. (6) Adjectives stand after the cases which they govern. Gr. 488. IV. This has already been re- marked in the Exerc. p. 106. note (1), and p. 174. notes (3) and (5). Worth, ttJertft, with the gen. (Gr. 399. 3.) Hurtful, ftydWift, with the dat. (Gr. 399. 2.) Sect. VIII. 2. Posit, of Words. Adj. Sf Pr. 1 7 7 That abuse is hurtful to (1) commerce. A stone (2) weighing four pounds ; a staff two yards long What is useful (3) for instruction, is not always fit for entertainment. (4) I have seen him, but (5) her I have not (1) Say: to the commerce. Commerce, t>er (2) Weighing, fcfywev* The adjective, in this ex- ample and the following, may either be placed after the substantive, as it is in English ; or before it, thus : A four pound (Gr. 157.) weighing stone ; a two yards long staff. The two adjectives here used are joined with the accusative case. Gr. 399. 3. (3) When similar adjectives, instead of governing their cases, are combined with prepositions, they, nevertheless, follow the substantives, as here : for instruction useful ; for entertainment calculated. For to be rendered by JU y prep. dat. Useful, nul^ltd) ; calculated, fit, btenltd) ; both adjectives governing the dative case. Gr. 399. 2. Say : the instruction, the entertainment, according to Gr. 391. 1.; and contract the article with the preposition, ju t>er, into pr, by Gr. 374-. IV. (4) The pronouns as subjects and objects. Gr. 489. (5) The object, her, in the beginning, which brings the subject, /, after the verb, in conformity with Gr. 476. 2. ; and 484-. //. Except 1. I 5 ] 78 Rules of Grammar. Part I. perceived a . He told (I) it me; they have recom- mended him to us. (2) This man is honest, but (3) that one is of a suspicious character 1 '. (4) These three pious persons will not maintain their right against (5) all those twenty cunning (1) The accusative or objective case of a personal or reciprocal pronoun put before the dative. Gr. 489. The circumstance has already been noticed. Exerc. p. 173. note (1). It, him, are the accusatives or objects; me, us, the dative cases of person. (2) The demonstrative pronoun, in the quality of a substantive, and of an adjective, and taking its position accordingly. Gr. 489. middle. First, used substantively, as here, when man is to be omitted; )iefer, this man. (3) That one, jenet, the demonstrative, without a substantive. The numeral, one, is not made use of, in German, in a suppletive capacity. (4) The demonstrative pronoun occupying the position of the article, in being put before adjectives and numerals. Gr. 489. middle. (5) The word title before the demonstrative pro- noun. Gr. 490. middle. a bemerfen* b |M)t in bofem 0lufe, is of a suspi- cious character. Sect. Fill. 2. Posit, of Words. Adj. $ Pr. 179 deceivers. Believe (1) me, I would not tell (2) it thee, if I were not convinced (3) of it. (4) As the government has refused me, the blame of the consequences does not reach (5) me. When mis- fortune threatens (6) us, hope animates (7) you. (1) Insert it, and say : believe to me it, contracting ttltr C into mtr Gr. 489. at the bottom of the page. (2) Say: to thee it, bit, for bit e6 To tell, faflttU (3) Of it, bawm* (4) The oblique case of a personal pronoun placed before the subject. Gr. 490. at the top of the page. Say : Since me the government refused has. To refuse, abtt>eifen In this member of the sentence, the verb is brought to the end by the conjunction as, b(U (5) Say : reaches me the blame of the consequences not. The personal pronoun before the subject, in a subsequent member. (6) Us before the subject, misfortune ; the verb at the end : When us misfortune threatens. (7-) You before the subject, in the subsequent member : animates you the hope. i 6 180 littles of Grammar. Parti, 3. Position of the Verb and Participle.* The man (1) who perverts the young heart by vicious discourses, brings upon himself a very dangerous responsibility. (2) He who knows the dispositions a of (3) human nature, (4) is sensible (5) what power early impressions exercise over the * Gr. 490 498. The position of the verb, in its relation to the subject and object, has been sufficiently set forth in 1. of this section,, where the substantive was spoken of. We shall, at present, therefore, only dwell upon those points which have not yet met with due attention ; viz. the effect of relative pronouns and relative adverbs upon the situation of the verb, and the influence of certain conjunctions. (1) A relative pronoun always causes the verb to go to the end, thus : The man who the young heart by vicious discourses perverts. G r. 4-90. ( 1 ). (2) He who is expressed by 2Ber Gr. 237. 4. Say : He who the dispositions of the human nature knows. (3) Say : of the human nature, according to Gr. 391. 1. (4) Is sensible, is aware, knows, roet ; verb SBtffetU (5) What power, Veld)e CWalt* This comes under the description of indirect interrogatives, which, like the relatives, bring the verb to the end. Gr. 490. 2. o> Sect. Fill. 3. Posit, of Words. The Verb. 1 8 1 mind a . The country (1) in which virtue has established b the love of liberty is truly happy : but (2) where vice has subdued honesty, there misery reigns in a thousand forms. The reason (3) why such a constitution d can have no long duration, and (4) produces no essential advantage to the people, is easy (5) to be explained. The foundation which supports 6 the edifice is without solidity, and the parts (6) of which the whole is composed are ill assorted f . The war which the (1) In which may be rendered by rootttt, wherein (Gr. 240. 8.) ; which, being a relative adverb, also forces the verb to the end. Gr. 491. Say: the virtue, according to Gr. 391. 1. (2) Wliere, n?0 ; a relative adverb. Say : Where the vice the honesty (Gr. 391. 1.) subdued has. (3) Why, ttmrum, to be considered as a relative adverb, or as an indirect question. (4) This verb is still influenced by the relative adverb why. The words will, therefore, follow in this manner : and no essential advantage to the people pro- duces. (5) Say : to explain. Gr. 343. 457. at the top of the page. (6) Of which, whereof, WorauS ; relative adverb. a bae> emutft, b begrtinben, c uberwalttgen* d bte SSerfaffung, bte taatStterfaffung, e tragem f fd)led)t jufammengeorbnet* 182 Rules of Grammar. Parti. nations 51 of Europe have carried on b for (1) so many years still rages with unabated c fury; (2) whence we have not to expect peace, but a continuation of our sufferings. The place (3) whi- ther the emperor, at the approach of the war, sent his family, is an island, which, both by nature and art, is strongly fortified. It is not known d (4) who conducted 6 the brave inhabitants in this attack; neither can Idiscover f (5) what cause first excited the resistance of the peopled But one sees (6) what a spirit of un- (1) For, signifying duration, may be rendered by the adverb lang, following the accusative, which case is employed to mark time. Gr. 451. middle. Here it will be : fo wele Sa&re lang* (2) Whence, bafyer, roeShalben, roeSroegen ; relative adverbs. Gr. 491. at the top of the page. (3) Whither, tt)ofytn ; a relative adverb. Gr.491. (4) Words of an indirect question cause the verb to go to the end. Who, tt)er, is one of those words. Gr. 492. (2). What is meant by an indirect question is explained in a note, Gr. 492. (5) What cause, tt)etd)e Urfadje ; another indirect question. (6) What to be rendered by wag fur Ctm Gr. 239. 7. It here forms an indirect question. a ba SSoIf. b fufyrem c unoermtnbert* d befannt e anftt&rem f aitSftnben, entbecfetu g ba3 SSolf* Sect. VIII. 3. Posit, of Words. Tlie Verb. 183 daunted a patriotism reigns in the breasts (1) of these generous b men. Who can guess (2) how this contest will end ? The cause (3) to which you may refer c for explanation of this extraor- dinary phenomenon in (4) history^is, the enormous ambition* 1 of the enemy. But it is difficult to com- prehend how that man could so entirely forget the dictates 6 of common sense f , (5) as to undertake such an arduous 5 work, without proper 11 caution. (6) One may doubt (7) whether one should (8) wonder more at his rash spirit of enterprise, or at the folly of his proceeding. (1) Say: in the breast, in ter SSrufl ; and refer to Exerc. p. 125. note (3). (2) Hoiv, tx>te 5 indirect question. (3) To which may be expressed by an adverbial relative, ttwattf (Gr. 240. 8.), which, equally with the pronoun, brings the verb to the end. May, faiUU (4) Say : in the history ; and see Gr. 392. 2. (5) Say : that he undertook. (6) The indefinite pronoun man* May, fatUU (7) Whether, ob ; indirect question. (8) To wonder, fid) tt)imt>ew ; a reflective verb. It is construed with the preposition ubef To wonder at a thing, fid) fiber eine @ad)e wunbern* d t>te Gi;hrfud)t e tie Sehre, 33orfd)rfft. . f ber Qemeine 9Henfd)entterf!ant>,.t)te gefunbe SSernunft* e ffywierifl* 184 Rules of Grammar. Parti. (I) When he brought me the book, he re- marked, that it required great attention and re- flection to understand it. I shall, therefore, not read it, before I have obtained* a sufficient know- ledge of the (2) chief principles (3) upon which the doctrines are built. As soon as I have ac- quired b that, I hope that I shall easily overcome the remaining difficulties, (4) although I do not (1) Certain conjunctions force the verb to the end of the sentence. Gr. 492. (3). Those which come under the operation of that law are printed in Italics. Say, for example : When he me the booh brought that it great attention and reflection required before (efye) / a sufficient knowledge of the chief principles obtained have. (2) Chief may be expressed by the word v)aupt, which is put before the substantive, in an undeclined form. Of the chief principles, tiott t>en v)aupt=rimt>* fd^en* The preposition of, $on, is here the same, in meaning, as concerning. (3) Upon which, TOOrauf* This subordinate mem- ber of the sentence may be so inserted as to let the verb, influenced by the conjunction, go to the very end ; in this manner : Before I a sufficient knowledge of the chief principles, upon which the doctrines built are, obtained have. Gr. 492. (4) Although, obQletd)* This conjunction is, gene- rally, divided by the personal pronoun. Gr. 380. middle. It brings the verb to the end. Gr. 492. (3). b erwerben. Sect. Fill. 3. Posit, of Words. The Verb. 1 85 claim any great quickness % or force b of (1) mind, in the investigation of philosophical problems. I occupy myself with these matters , (2) in order that I may exercise the faculties (3) which nature has granted me. For, (4) as a mechanical instrument loses its efficiency 11 , if we neglect the use (5) for which it is destined, (6) in the same manner the powers of animated 6 beings f become weak and useless, if they are debarred from the use 8 of their natural functions' 1 . (1) Say : of the mind, according to Gr. 391. 1. The mind, bet Ctf!* (2) In order that, bamtt. Verb to the end. (3) A subordinate member, which may be stationed within the sentence, in the manner pointed out in the third note of the foregoing page, thus : in order that I the faculties, which to me nature granted has, exercise may. There exists, however, no obligation to place the sentence in that succession ; it may like- wise proceed in this way : in order that I the facul- ties exercise may, which to me nature granted has. Gr. 492. Nature, We S^atur, according to Gr. 391. 1. (4) As, gletcfywte. Gr. 492. (3). (5) For which, n>OjU* Gr. 240. 8. (6) In the same manner, attf eben We 2Crt, eben fo. a We enxmbtl&eit* b We tdrfe* c We d We Bfrffmnfeit. e belebf * f ba$ SBefen, efc&fyf. g tie Uebumj* h We 186 Rules of Grammar. Parti. (1) As I came out of the garden, with a certain friend (2) whom you know, we saw this man (3) in the street. After we had observed, (4) for some time, the motions and gestures (5) which he made a , we concluded that he was not in his senses b . (6) When we sought to stop him, he furiously attacked us ; and as c we did not wish (7) to create d a disturbance in the street, we let (1) As is here best rendered by a( Gr. 492. (3) ; and 377. (2) This will form an intermediate member, thus : As I with a certain friend, whom you know, out of the garden came. (3) In the street, auf ber @trae, auf ter affe* (4) For some time, etne &\t latt(J Exerc. p. 182. note (1). (5) An intermediate member : After we the mo- tions and gestures, which he made, for some time ob- served had. See the last note but two, and p. 184. note (3). (6) The infinitive with JU, preceding a verb which is under the influence of one of the foregoing con- junctions, thus : when we him to stop sought. Gr. 494. (7) When the infinitive is attended with several other words, it is preferable, on account of the length of the sentence, to let it follow after the verb final, as a distinct member, as here : as we did not wish a a macfyen* b bet (Sinnen* c ba d serurfacfyem Sect. VIII. 3. Posit, of Words. The Verb. 187 him go. ( 1 ) As he cannot find the book, we must read the passage (2) some other time. (3) If you will come to-morrow, I will speak with you. (4) Be- cause he has not heard me read, he will not believe disturbance in the street to create. The sentence would appear too complicated, in this manner : as we did not a disturbance in the street to create wish. Gr. 494. middle. (1) When the infinitive is without the preposition Jtt, it is governed by the verb with which it is asso- ciated, as strictly as a case of declension would be governed ; and is, consequently, in the position of words dependent upon the situation which the verb occupies. When the latter, therefore, is placed at the end, by the influence of any particular word, the infini- tive must absolutely precede it. Gr. 494. middle. Say here : as he the booh not find can ; and render as by bd* Find is the infinitive, without U (Gr. 416. 3.), which, being governed by the verb can, must neces- sarily be put before the latter, as this happens to have its place at the end. (2) Some other time, etn anfcermal, or, auf ettt an* bermaL (3) The infinitive without ju, before the final verb. Say : If you to-morrow come will ; and see the last note but one. (4) The auxiliary verb, which ought, in consequence of a preceding conjunction, to be at the end, is put before the infinitive, when the preterite participle, connected with the auxiliary, is also changed into an infinitive. This change happens to the participles of 188 Rules of Grammar. Parti. that I can read. (1) Although I have been ob- liged to confine myself very much, I still a enjoy several verbs, which are mentioned, Gr. 457. below. Refer, upon this subject, to Exerc. p. 149. note (2); and to the notes of p. 150. and 151. Here, for example, the conjunction because would, according to the common rule, bring the verb has to the end : Because he me not read heard has ; but the preterite participle heard, after the infinitive read, being like- wise changed into the infinitive, the auxiliary must stand before the two infinitives : Because he me not has read heard, mil er mid) md)t bat lefen borem And of the two infinitives, that which governs is put last. Gr. 496. (1) Another example of the circumstances men- tioned in the foregoing note. The preterite participle of the verb muffen, to be obliged, assumes the infinitive character, when brought near the infinitive mood of another verb. Gr. 457. Therefore, although a par- ticular conjunction makes the auxiliary verb final, yet the auxiliary cannot, with two infinitives together, be put after, but must stand before them. This remark has been already made, in the Exerc. p. 151. note (1). The ear would revolt at the monotonous and disagreeable fall of the sentence. This fall is broken and impeded by placing, as it were, the auxiliary in its way. The sentence, now, is thus arranged : ofc- gleid) id) mid) fyabe febt dngejogen batten muffen. * bennocb,, or bod) nocf)* Sect. Fill. 3. Posit, of Words. The Verb. 189 some liberty. I think a (1) it is certainly 15 very ad- visable to mention the occurrence. (2) Had I any opportunity of seeing his brother, I would relate it to him. For (3) the longer one delays an unpleasant business, the more painful it becomes. (4) Heaven grant that it may turn out c otherwise ! (5) Oh ! (1) When any one of the conjunctions which are here in question is not expressed but understood, such as baf-i and roetttt (Gr. 413. 2., and 4-66. below), it loses its power of moving the verb to the end. Gr. 494. In this place bap is understood. It need not here govern the subjunctive mood. (2) The conjunction rcetttt understood. See the foregoing note. Had must be the subjunctive, fydtfe, because the sentence is connected with a conditional future, / ivould relate, (3) The verb goes to the end, in the prior member of a comparative sentence beginning with ^fc Gr. 493. Exerc. p. 87. note (1). Refer, concerning the meaning of 3fe, to Gr. 379. (4) The subjunctive mood follows, in general, the same laws as the indicative. When it forms an ex- clamation, it precedes the subject, thus : Grant Heaven! Gr. 494. //. (5) Say: Oh! might this day be over! omitting that, and inserting bod), after the subject : ) ! m6d)te biefer Sag bod) ooruber fepn ! or simply : -D ! baf? btefer Sag wriiber ware ! a Qlattbem t aUerbincj3, 190 Rules of Grammar. Parti. that this day might be over ! (1) I should not have believed it. (2) Had it been any other person, I should not have minded it. (3) Give me a description of the country which you have seen. Come, and set yourself by me a . (4) John, bring me my hat ; Mary, sweep my room. (5) Be quiet, my child : go home, good people b . (1) This example is to be found in the Grammar, 494. //. ; and is here given again, to show the position of the subjunctive mood. (2) This is a repetition of what has been intro- duced upon other occasions, viz. the omission of the conjunction if. It shows here merely the position of the subjunctive mood. (3) In the imperative mood, the personal pronouns, when used, are always put after it. Gr. 495. ///. In the second person, both singular and plural, the pro- nouns &U, thou, Sifyr/ you, are commonly omitted ; but when the third personal is employed for the pronoun of address (Gr. 217. 3.) it must be ex- pressed, and then stands after the imperative. In the first and second examples, the third person plural, @te, may be made use of. (4) Speaking to a man-servant, employ the third personal, cr; to a female servant, fie, according to Gr. 222. above. (5) The address is, in the two next examples, to . ju mtr, neben mtd> b &ute, plur. Sect. VIII. 3. Posit, of Words. The Verb. 191 (1)1 desire a not only to have my money, but also the interest. I can produce twenty witnesses concerning this matter. Will you doubt the asser- tion of such a man ? It is impossible to believe all the little tales b of a slanderous world. (2) I shall never tell thee the author of this publication ; it would (3) be a violation of confidence and friend- ship. It is probable (4) that the enemy will now make proposals of peace ; but who can believe (5) that, on that account , hostilities will have an be in the second person ; and the pronouns )u, thou, and Sfyr, you, may be understood. (1) The place of the infinitive is at the end ; not, however, after the indicative or subjunctive moods, when these are made final. Gr. 495. IV. For ex- ample : / desire not only my money, but also the in- terest, to have. I can twenty witnesses, concerning this matter, produce. (2) The infinitive, in the composition of the future tense. Gr. 495. (3) This is the conditional future, of which the component infinitive likewise goes to the end, thus : it would a violation of confidence and friendship be. (4) The future brought to the end by a conjunc- tion ; the component infinitive before the auxiliary verb. Gr. 496. above. (5) Another instance of the future being at the end. u b ber (Scfymcffchnacf, c banim, 192 Rules of Grammar. Parti. end? There is no doubt, (1) that negotiations between the two'powers will be commenced a ; but (2) whether they will be brought to a desirable 1 ' is- sue , that is the question. We ought not to (3) suffer this to happen. I will (4) cause those people d to come to me. They must (5) learn to write, and to read. I shall (6) bid them go : they will wish to stay here. We shall (7) hear an Italian female 6 sing, and see (1) The future passive at the end. The auxiliary verb before the component infinitive. Gr. 496. (2) The future passive again at the end, by the power of the conjunction whether, ob+ (3) One infinitive governing another. That which is governed stands before the one which governs : as here, to happen, gefcfyehcn, is governed by to suffer, laffen/ and is put before it. Gr. 496. middle . - (4) This infinitive governs the other, to come ; and, therefore, stands after it. To cause, laffem (5) Learn is the governing infinitive : to write and to read are governed. (6) Bid, wish, are governing infinitives; go, stay governed. Express wish by rooUctt; to fo'e?, hetfjen* The governing infinitives here, belong to future tenses. (7) Say : We shall an Italian female sing hear, and a Frenchman dance see. Hear and see are parts of the future tenses : we shall hear, and we shall see. As governing infinitives, those words are placed after the other infinitives, sing, dance, which are governed. * einletten, sep. b erroimfcfyt. e ber 2Cu3anblung, welcfye gut unb nfifeltcfy tft, etner 2$at uor, welcfye blofii gldnjenb ij! or even thus : 3$ jiehe immer etne ^anblung, roelcfye gut unb nu^lid) iff, etner SSfyat, wetc^e blo^t gldnjenb ifl, tour* But the first way is the best. (1) The component particle after the infinitive, governed by the verb. Gr. 321. (2) Separation of the component in the imperative mood. Gr. 319. /. 1. ; and 320. //. 2. (3) The compound verb being brought to the end of the sentence (as here, by means of the relative pronoun), is not separated. Gr. 497. middle ; and 319. /. 2. (4) A man, jemanb* Gr. 242. 3. (5) The compound verb at the end, on account of the conjunction when, and, therefore, not separated. To enter into, eingehetl, verb transitive. (6) The compound verb again at the end, because a toermeiben. b bte .Sttfucf&altung. c etn fibertrfe* bener tab, etn ubermajnger rab* d etnflofjen* K 2 196 Rules of Grammar. Parti. all the means, which he possesses, to (I) execute* the conditions. (2) In order to produce* such an effect, it is necessary to (3) prove* the utility of the measure. We have (4) communicated the in- telligence to our friend, and have omitted no cir- cumstance in the narrative. (5) A refreshing morning, and the rising sun. (6) The sea nourishing fish, and the earth bearing of the conjunction that, consequently not separated. Employ, in the subjunctive mood. To employ, tilt* roenbem (1) The compound verb separated, in the infinitive, by iu Gr. 497- at the bottom of the page ; and 320. 3. (2) Farther examples of the separation in the in- finitive by ju* In order, um. Gr. 418. B. 2. (3) To prove, bartfyutt* Gr. 315. El. 96. above. (4) Separation of the compound in the preterite participle by the syllable ge* Gr. 497 and 498. ; and 320. 4. (5) Position of the participle. Gr. 498. Sect V. First, the present participle used as an adjective. Gr. 498. 7. (6) The present participle is always preceded by the case which it governs. Gr. 498. //. Say : The fish nourishing sea, the fruit bearing earth. Fish an d fruit must, in German, be in the plural, fishes, fruits. * erftiEen, uoEjieljem b fyerttorbringen. c ber runb Sect. Fill. 3. Posit, of Words.- The Verb. 197 fruit. ( 1 ) The acknowledged rules of wisdom teach us not to be elated % and self-confident b , on account of a victory (2) obtained ; and not to despise the vanquished enemy. Destroyed towns, and burnt villages; ruined fields, and afflicted* people d exhi- bited a (3) most melancholy spectacle. (4) We have seen many scenes of terror 6 ; but never have we witnessed f a greater calamity : The events which are (5) related in history cannot excite (6) (1) The preterite participle as an adjective. Gr. 498. 7. Acknowledged, ancrf amit. (2) Say : an obtained victory. Gr. 344-. at the bot- tom of the page. (3) The superlative idea most, after the indefinite article expressed by some adverb, such as duferjt, ex- tremely ; fyocfyj!, highly. See Exerc. p. 34. note 2. (4) The preterite participle, combined with an aux- iliary verb, has its station at the end of the sentence. Gr. 498. IV. (5) When the auxiliary verb, in the indicative or sub- junctive mood, is brought to the end, and meets there with a preterite participle, the participle stands before it. Which in the history related are. Gr. 499. above. Also when the preterite participle and the infinitive of an auxiliary verb are together, the participle is placed before the infinitive. Gr. 499. middle. a jfolj* b anmapenb* c bebrancjt, ungtucfHcfy,. d Stefien, plur. e raufen erregenbe JCufirttte* f reafyrnefymen* K 3 198 Rules of Grammar. Parti. equal feeling. For it is evident, that many cir- cumstances must have (I) undergone a change, and that, consequently, the same effect cannot be produced upon (2) posterity, which was felt by the contemporary generation 3 . 4. Position of the Adverb and the Preposition.* (3) Very cold weather, an extremely strong wind. He read the letter (4) slowly, and wrote the (]} When the preterite participle, infinitive, and verb final come together, they are arranged in the order here marked; thus: that many circumstances a change undergone have must. Gr. 499. below. But the verb final may also be put before the preterite participle, and the infinitive, in this manner : and that consequently the same effect upon posterity cannot pro- duced be. (2) Say: the posterity, according to Gr. 391. 1. * Gr. 500. Sect. VI. ; 502. Sect VII. The adverb and the preposition, with its case, occupy in the posi- tion of words, nearly the same place. We, therefore, comprehend them here in the same division. (3) An adverb joined to an adjective stands before it. Gr. 500. /. (4) An adverb referring to the action of the verb, modifying and defining that action, has its place after the verb, and commonly after the object. Gr. 500. II. 8 ba jefet lebenbe dkfcfylecfyf* Sect. V1IL 4. Posit, of Words. Adv. Sf Prep. 199 answer hastily. I have (1) often admired his dili- gence, and industry a ; but I have also frequently blamed his excessive punctuality and strictness. You saw the man yesterday no ! but I have to- day seen his son. My supposition 15 , (2) perhaps is unfounded ; but my friend, probably, knows the exact state of the matter . This statement does (3) (1) Those adverbs, which imply a notion of time, find their station before the object. Of that descrip- tion are, often, frequently, to-day , yesterday. Time, indeed, generally has the precedency. It is, however, in some degree, regulated by the rhythm of the sentence ; for example, it will sound better to say : 3fd) fafy ben Sftann geft ern than : %fy fafc geftern ben fjjfantt, because the monosyllable, SJZftnn/ does not close the sentence so well as gefletn/ a word of two syllables. In the other instances, those adverbs are best before the object. Gr. 500. (2) Certain adverbs, whose signification is vague and undefined, may indifferently be placed any where. Such are, perhaps, probably, and others. Gr. 501. above. This is the contrary of what was said con- cerning the adverbs marking time. (3) The negative ntd)t, not, is commonly stationed after the object. Gr. 501. a t>ie SSetriebfamfett* b bie SSermuthung, bie SSor* e bie C (3) In town they entertain, in ter t fyat tttfln* Gr.392. 2.; 244. 2. (4) The preposition with its case, here, defines the subject nominative, and therefore immediately follows it. Gr.503. IV. From, auS, Sect. VIIL 5. Posit, of Words. Conj. 203 flattering a description of the renovated spirit b of the people. The man (1) with the long nose, and the small eyes, shook his head. He (2) quickly drove the enemy over the river, and immediately secured the passage with a strong guard. 5. Position of the Conjunction and Interjection.* (3) When the spring pours fresh life into na- (1) The preposition with its case, again near the subject nominative. (2) The preposition, with its case, meeting the ad- verb, the latter precedes. Say : He drove the enemy quickly over the river, and secured the passage im- mediately with a strong guard. Gr. 504. V. * Gr. 505. Sect. VJII. ; 507. Sect. IX. The in- fluence of the conjunction upon the collocation of other words, has already been amply illustrated, especially in 1. and 3. of this section, where its effect is shown upon the noun substantive, and the verb. These operations will, here, be briefly recapitulated. The natural place of the conjunction is in the beginning of the sentence ; but this circumstance undergoes changes and modifications in several individual words. Gr. 505. 7. (3) Some conjunctions carry the verb to the end. Gr. 505. //. SBenn, when, is one of them. fcfymd&elhaft* b ber etff, K 6 204 Rules of Grammar. Part I. ture, (1) the mind itself feels a renewal of its powers. (2) Then the bright sun-beams seem to chase away the mist, which hung upon our soul. (3) Scarcely the recollection of past evils remains. We will, (4) therefore, hail the approach (1) Subsequent member, which may begin with fo Gr.480. 12. (2) Conjunctions, which cause the subject nomi- native to stand after the verb. Gr. 505. ///. Then, t>a, or bann* (3) Scarcely, faiim, is one of those conjunctions, which indifferently may be put either before or after the verb. Gr. 505. I consider the particle faum, scarcely, as a conjunction, because, being brought into correspondence with the conjunction al, when, it serves to connect the members of a sentence. For example : Scarcely had he spoken, when all the people arose. Here, the two members of the sentence, he had spoken, and all the people arose, evidently owe their connection to the particle scarcely, as well as to when. Frequently the signification of faum is purely ad- verbial, as in the very example of our text ; but this is likewise the fact with other conjunctions. (4) Therefore, baber ; before or after the verb. It is only when these conjunctions are in the beginning Sect. Fill. 5. Posit, of Words. Conj. 205 of this delightful season. (I) Thus speaks the au- thor; he adds, (2) besides, the (3) following ob- servation. All, (4) however, is transient 51 ; (5) con- sequently this beautiful season will pass away 1 '. It is, (6) therefore, our duty to prepare ourselves of the sentence, that they affect the position of the subject nominative. (1) Thus, fo ; generally in the beginning. Gr. 507. ///. (2) Besides, uberbiefl* Gr. 505. III. (3) The article before following, is omitted in German. This participle seems to be in lieu of a pronoun. Gi\ 178. 2. Say : folQente S5emer!ung (4) However, t>od), inbeffett. When these, and some other conjunctions, are in the beginning of the sentence, the subject nominative may be put after the verb, or not. Gr. 506. ///. (5) Consequently, mttbttt ; it commonly stands at the beginning of a sentence, and causes the subject to be placed after the verb. Gr. 505. ///. (6) Therefore, fllfo* This 'and the following con- junctions may, when in the beginning, bring the subject after the verb ; but they need not always have that effect. Gr. 505. below. c fid) 5 anfd)tc!en, or, wrbereiten ; fid) auf etrca. : gefafj t machem 206 Mules of Grammar. Part I. for a change a : (1) yet ought we not to lose the present enjoyment. Reason, (2) indeed, recom- mends to us a cautious use of our pleasures ; but (3) neither does (4) wisdom teach, that we should darken our present hours with apprehensions 13 concerning the future d , (5) nor does (6) expe- rience show that any advantage attends 6 such anticipation. All human affairs f are uncertain, (7) but they are, on that account g , not to be (8) (1) Yet, t>od) See the preceding note. (2) Indeed, jtt>ar See note (6) of the former page. (3) Neither, n?et>er. See note (6) of the former page. (4) Say : the wisdom, according to Gr. 391. 1. (5) Nor, nocfy* The subject after the verb. (6) Does show; say: shows. Gr. 271. 3. Say: the experience. (7) The conjunction abet* It has great privileges, in regard to position, as it may stand almost any where in the sentence. But it neither influences the collocation of the verb, nor that of the subject* Gr. 506. IV. And it does not change the operation of other words upon the constitution of the sentence. In this first example, it may be put in the beginning. (8) Say : to despise ; and see Gr. 343. 457. a btc SSerdnbetung. b bte 33eforgntf? c roegen, prep. gen. d bte 3?nft, the future. fetwmtt/dat. Sect. VIII. 5. Posit, of Words. Conj. 207 despised. They are imperfect, (1) but still they have their value. They are mixed with good and evil; (2) but the good, (3) upon the whole, pre- ponderates a . We wish to be happy, but we do not always choose the right means. We hear many complaints of the misery of human life : (4) but are the grounds of these complaints for the most part just? We have our sufferings, and have (5) also (1) Let aber, here, follow the verb. (2) 2ber may stand, here, after the subject nomina- tive, the good. (3) Upon the whole, tm QanjetU This is a preposi- tion with its case, or, as it may be called, a compound adverb, and is to be placed after the verb : the good preponderates, upon the whole. (4) Here it may be best to begin with aber The situations which have been pointed out for the con- junction aber, in these notes, are not insisted upon, as the most appropriate, in those instances ; but they are designed to show the variety of position to which that conjunction is liable. (5) The conjunction attcfy/ also, has nearly the same character, in point of collocation, as aber* It may almost stand any where. Gr. 506. IV. There is, however, a difference between 2Clld) and fet>n, bag Uebevgenricfyt fyabem '208 Rules of Grammar. Part I. our joys. Providence administers* both with a kind and impartial hand. The poor man in the midst of his necessities 15 has also his comforts c and pleasures : the rich, who has many advantages' 1 , has with 6 all his abundance, also his cares and troubles f . A man, who gives himself up g to his desires, is never satisfied 11 with what' is sufficient: he (1) co vets k also that which 1 is unnecessary and super- fluous. (2) Alas ! human life is subject to great vicis- namely, that aitd) may, when in the beginning of the sentence, bring the subject after the verb, which abet cannot do. 2Cbet (when not in the beginning) always gives energy to the word that precedes it ; and this may be said to apply, in a certain degree, to ail$ (1) 2tltd) cannot well be placed, in this instance, between the personal pronoun he, er/ and the verb, because it would produce a false emphasis upon that pronoun, contrary to the sense. (2) It is said, Gr. 507. Sect. IX., that the interjec- tion may be placed, wherever it presents itself. By this is meant, that there is no grammatical ground foj- limiting it to any particular position. Interjections barretcfyen, erthetlen, auStfyeUen. b ba SScburf* ni c bte SSefyaQltcfyfett, ba6 gabfaU d bet 83or$ug* c bei, prep. dat. f tie 83efd)wetbe $$ ercjeben, dat h jufrtebem { mit bem wa, with what. * be gebren* l ba roaS Sect. Fill. 5. Posit, of Words. Interj. 209 situdes 3 ! O ! how grateful (I) ought every one to be, who has a moderate share of affliction 11 ! (2) are sounds expressive of certain instantaneous feel- ings, and will find their situation wherever those feelings arise. For this reason, those ejaculations* are, generally, observed at the head of the sentence, because, as signs of our emotions, they start forward, before our ideas can be arranged in regular speech. This, however, it will be understood, is not owing to any scientific rule ; but to the nature of the word, and the affection of the person who makes use of it. Wherever his feelings and emotions prompt him to utter the interjection, there it stands ; there is its right place. Alas, 3fd) ! Say : the human life, by Gr. 391. 1. (1) Ought, fottte* Gr.265. (2) These, and similar exclamations, may be called artificial, or compound interjections. They contain an association of ideas, and in this, differ from those simple and primitive sounds, which are strictly called interjections. Refer to Gr. 386. ber SBccfyfel, ber Unbejftmb* b son getben. EXERCISES. PART II.* MISCELLANEOUS COMPOSITION. SECTION I. DETACHED SENTENCES. (1) HUMAN life is so uncertain, (2) that it is our duty (3) to employ every moment of our time. No possession is of (4) equal value with the con- sciousness of (5) honesty and virtue. * The references, in the Second Part of the Ex- ercises, for the rules to be observed, will be chiefly to the notes of the First Part. Occasions may occur where the Grammar will be directly quoted : but they will not be frequent. (1) Exerc. p. 12. note 1. ; and p. 13. n. 1. (2) Ex. p. 184. n. 1.; p. 203. n. 3. Refer to 186. n. 6,7. (3) Ex. p. 191. n. 1. ; (4) Ex. p. 106. n.l.; p. 107. n.5.; p. 176. n. 5. (5) Ex. p. 12. n. 1. ; p. 13. n. 1. ; p. 99. n. 1. 212 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. (1) Truth (2) ought (3) to be held so sacred, (4) that not the slightest violation (5) of it should be permitted. You (6) ought not to (7) deviate from it% even b in jest. The conquest (8) of passion gives ten times' 1 more happiness 6 , (9) than we can derive from the gratification f ( 1 ) of it. ( Toiler. ) The height 5 of good breeding 11 is (11) shown rather in (12) never giving offence 1 , than in doing (1) Ex. p. 12. n. 1. ; p. 13. n. 1. ; p. 99. n. 1. (2) Ex. p. 108. n. 1. ; p. 130. n. 3. ; p. 135. n. 4. (3) Ex. p. 197. n.6. (4) Ex. p. 198. n. 1. (5) Ex. p.lll. n.2.; p. 14-7. n. 5. (6) Ex. p. 108. n.l.; p. 130. n. 3.; p. 135. n. 4. You, man* (7) Ex. p. 191. n.l. (8) Ex. p. 12. n. 1.; p. 13. n. 1.; p. 99. n. 1. (9) Ex. p. 184-. n. 1.; p. 203. n. 3. (10) Ex. p. 111. n.2.; p. 147- n. 5. (11) Say: shows itself. (12) Say: in that, or by that, one (man) never offence gives : t>arin t>aft, or baburd) baf} Ex. p. 138. n.2.; p. 164. n. 4. a bavon. b not even, nicfyt einmal. c bie Ueber* ttrinbung* d jebnma!. e bie 3ufnebem>it { bie SBefriebtgung. ber fy&cfyjle rab, the highest degree, the summit, the height h bie feine eben6art ' ber Sect. I. Detached Sentences. 213 obliging 11 things. ( 1 ) Thus he, (2) that never shocks b you, (3) though he is seldom entertaining , is more (4) likely to keep your favour than he, who often en- tertains, and sometimes displeases you. (Tatler.) (5) In great undertakings, it is difficult (6) to please every body. This was an observation of the wise (7) Solon. (Plutarch's Solon.) Prudence and caution are qualities (8) which rarely accompany a bad d conscience. (Sully.) Necessity is the usual snare, which (9) makes (10) men fall 6 into meanness f . (Tatler.) The highest 5 act of the mind h , is to possess' itself with tranquillity in imminent danger, and to have its thoughts so free (11) as to act, at that time, without perplexity k . (Tatler.) I 1 ) Ex. p. 204. n. 2, 3. (2) Ex. p. 44. n. 3.; p. 47. n. 3. (3) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (4) Say : Will sooner (efyer) your favour keep. (5) Ex. p. 164. n. 2.; p. 84. n.5,6. (6) Ex. p. 129. n. 8. (7) Ex. p. 16. n. 3. and 4. (8) Ex. p. 180. n. 1. (9) Instead of makes, say : seduces. (10) Ex. p. 10. n. 4. ; p. 172. n. 4. (II) Say : so that it acts. Ex. p. 131. n. 3. ,>6flid)feiten erweifeiu b beleibigem c em un* tetfyaltenbet efeUffyafter. d bo. e oerfaEem f tie 9liet>erttdcfyti9?ett. er&aben. h trie ele.. ftcfy beroaffnem k imbefancjen, without perplexity. 214 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. The best speculations* are those, (1) which promise only moderate advantages, but are exempt from all risk, and guarded against all chances. (Sully.) The application of the best remedies is (2) of no effect, (3) if the patient opposes them. (Sully.) It is the greatest and justest skill b , (4) in a man (5) of superior understanding, to know (6) how to be on a level (7) with his companions. (Tatler.) All virtues are mediums , and have their ex- tremes' 1 . (Memoirs of Col. Hutchinson, p. 285. 4to. ed.) We are often punished for the sufferings' which our imagination creates, by real afflictions', which teach us, but too truly 8 , what misfortune is. (Madame de Stael, Corinne.) (1) Ex. p. 180. n. 1. (2) Of, toon/ prep. dat. (3) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (4-) The genitive : of a man. (5) Express of, by toon. (6) Ex. p. 132. n. 1.; p. 151. n.5. (7) On a level, aitf gletcfyem ^fufj a bet 2tnfd)lag, bte Unternefymung* b bfe eroanbt* fceit* c fatten btc 9JWteljiraf e d f onncn, ubertrteben werbem e ba geiben* f baS Sriibfal, 8 beutltcfy. h wiberjheitcnb* * awamacfyem k bt Sect. I. Detached Sentences. 215 (1) The fortune of many men, like some trees, never shows* a flower. (2) One must be prepared (3) to expect every thing 5 from the disposition (4) of mankind. They are, in general, (5) attached to their duties, to so- ciety, to their kindred, by means of their hopes, and their interests' 1 ; "not by obligations, good faith 6 , and virtue. (Sully.) The expression of the countenance (6) exer- cises a great power over the human heart : and (7) when (8) you read, in that countenance, signs of a secret disapprobation (9), it always excites disquietude. (Madame de Stael.) True humanity f consists not in a squeamish g (1) Sic et hominum multis fortuna sine flore est. Plin. N.H.XVI. 40. ed. Bipont.. (2) Ex. p. 147. n. 8. (3) Ex. p. 186. n. 6, 7. (4) Ex. p. 10. n. 4. ; p. 172. n. 4. (5) Ex. p. 197. n. 4. (6) 2(uubett, verb compound separable. Ex. p. 66. 6. ; p. 67. n. 1. ; p. 68. n. 1, 2. ; p. 194. n. 3. 7. (7) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (8) Ex. p. 147. n. 8. (9) Ex. p. 167. n. 1. a geben, Ijerttorbrtngem b afle, every thing. er* mtttcljt* d bet SSottyetl. e bte $reue f bte fcfyenliebe* g uber bte SSftaaf? e empfmbUd)* 21 6 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II ear, it consists (1) not in starting*, and shrinking b , at c such tales as these, but in a disposition of heart to relieve misery. True humanity appertains* ra- ther to the mind, than to the nerves, and prompts 6 (2) men to use real and active endeavours to execute the actions (3) which it suggests. (Wilberforce.) After all f , (4) virtue is that which ensures, in the most certain manner, success to every great undertaking. For wisdom, equity, good discipline, order, courage, good fortune, are things which vir- tue produces, in the succession, in which they are here named; and this is the whole 5 connecting chain of (5) all actions, which are truly great. (Sully.) (6) One ought to reckon on h the ingratitude of men, and yet not to omit to do them good. We must serve them', not so much k on their (7) account (1) Ex. p. 164-. n.4.; p. 212. n. 12. (2) Ex. p.10. n.4. ;p.!2. n. I.;p.l72. n. 4. ; p. 69. n. 4-. ; p. 80. n. 4. (3) Ex. p. 184. n. 3. ; p. 185. n. 3. (4) Ex. p. 12. n. 1. ; p. 65. n. 2. ; p. 99. n. 1. (5) Ex. p. 97. n. 3. (6) Ex. p. 147. n. 8. (7) Sfyrer felbft wegen, on their account. jufammenfafyren, flufeem b uru uberfefyem c ttber ityn erfyabem d erroerben, tterfdjaffen, e prufcn* f uberein* jjimmem * &ur ^>anb, gecjenwarttg* Sect. I. Detached Sentences. 221 drop 8 out before we are aware b : whereas a lie is troublesome, and sets a (1) man's invention upon the rack: and one trick c needs a great d many more to help it out. The coin that is (2) most current 6 in the world, is flattery ; the only benefit f of which is, that (3) by hearing what we are not, we may be in- structed (4) in what we (5) ought to be. Honourable age is not that which standeth 5 in length of time, nor that is measured by number of years ; but wisdom is grey hair (6) unto man, and unspotted life is old age h . (7) O blessed 1 health ! thou art above all gold and treasure: (8) it is thou (9) who enlargest the soul, and openest all its powers to receive instruc- (1) Leave out this genitive case, and say, the invention. Invention, bte (5rftnbung3fraff To set upon the rack, foltem* (2) Ex. p. 35. n. 2. (3) Say : when we hear ; and see Ex. p. 220. n. 5. 7. (4) Say : in that which, in bem Wd* (5) @epn foUten* See Ex. p. 135. n.4. (6) Ex. p. 141. n.2. (7) Ex. p. 174. n. 6. (8) Say: thou art it. (9) Ex. p. 47. n. 1. fen* b ftcfy t>erfe$en c ber 33etrug. d nod? wett mefyme. e gangbar* f ber e bejfefyem h fyofyeS TClter* { gefegnet, fyocfygelobt, L 3 222 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. tion, and to relish (1) virtue. (2) He that has thee, (3) has little more to wish for and he that is so wretched (4) as to want thee, wants every thing with thee! a (Sterne.) SECTION II. FABLES. 1. The Eagle and his (5) young ones. An eagle, with his young ones, flew (6) up to the clouds. How steadfastly (7) you look at the sun, (8) said they to their father ; (9) it does not (1) efallen an ber Sugenb 511 fcaben. (2) Ex. p. 47. n.5. ; p, 180. n. 2. (3) Render this so : fyat feftr WentQ JU roimfcfyett itbrtg. (4) Leave out as, and put the infinitive with u ; or change as into that, with the indicative mood fol- lowing. Say : tton btr tterlaffen ju fet)tu (5) Ex. p. 113. n. 3. Say : bcffen SunQC* (6) ^tnaufflieQen, verb compound inseparable. Ex. p. 194. n. 3. (7) It will be most proper to use the second per- sonal pronoun, bii. See the pronouns of address, Gr. 217. 3.- Steadfastly, untterwanbt ; to look at, etroaS anfehen/ aitfcfyauetu (8) Ex. p. 165. n. 2. (9) It (the Sun), fte See Gr. 121. bem mangelt aUeS jugleid) mit bir* Sect. II. Fables. 223 dazzle you. Children, (1) answered the king of the birds, my father, grandfather, and great grand- father a have b (2) looked at it in the same manner. Follow their example, and (3) mine ; and you will never be compelled to bend d down your eyes. Instruction, and good example, complete the outlines 6 of (4) nature. 2. The Ass and (5) the Wild Boar { . An ass had the impertinence (6) to follow a wild boar, and to brays after him h , for the (7) pur- pose of insulting him. The noble animal, (8) per- ceiving from whence' the injury proceeded, (9) quietly k continued his pace, (10) without honour- ing Long-ears 1 with the least attention. (1) Ex. p. 165. n.2. (2) Ex. p. 194-. n. 3. ; p. 196. n. 4. (3) Ex. p. 44. n. 3. ; p. 45. n. 2. (4) Say, of the nature, bet iJlatur/ according to Gr. 391. 1. (5) Ex. p. 98. n. 3. (6) Ex. p. 129. n. 9. (7) Ex. p. 63. n. 3.; p. 113. n. 4.; p. 130. n. 5.; p. 162. n.6. (8) Ex. p. 77. n. 1. ; p. 139. n. 1. (9) Gr. 491. Ex. p. 99. n. 2. ; p. 198. n. 4. (10) Ex. p. 60. n.4.; p. 131. n. 5. ; p. 151. n.4. bet Urgrofmter. b anfdjauen, sep. c auf eben bte 2tt* d nteberfcfylagetu e bet runbjug* f bet (Sber, ba nrilbe cfywefn* * efelmafng fcfyreien* h fyinfer tfyn fyer* ' roofyer* k vu^tg* L 4 224 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. Silence and contempt are the best weapons (1) which a sensible a man can employ against a blockhead. 3. The Sheep and the Thorn-bush*. A sheep, (2) being separated from the flock, was overtaken by a storm. (3) For the purpose of obtaining shelter, it placed itself under a thorn- bush, and remained there (4) till the rain was over d . It gained 6 its end f (5) of escaping the rain ; but the poor creature left behind (6) a great deal (7) of wool. Thus a lawsuit (8) often? procures the desired object, but at (9) an expense far above its value. 4. The two (10) Cocks. Two cocks (11) were contending for h the sove- (1) Ex. p. 180. n. 1. ; p. 191. n. 1. 2) Ex. p. 77. n. 1.; p. 139. n. 1. '3) Ex. p. 63. n. 3. ; p. 113. n.4. 4) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. 5) Ex. p. 129. n. 9. 6) To leave behind, JurutflajTen* Ex. p. 67. n. 1. ; p. 194. n.3. (7) Say : much wool. (8) Ex. p. 99. n. 2. ; p. 114. n. 2. A lawsuit, em (10) The two, may here be expressed by t>ie SSeiben. Ex. p. 219. n.4. (11) Ex. p. 55. n.7. ; p. 75. n. 2. b bcr 2>ornf!raud)> c uberfatfem d wruber* e emicfyem f bte tfbficfyf. * 6fter. h um, prep. ace. Sect. II. Fables. 225 reign ty a of a dunghill. The combat was fierce and bloody: at last, (1) one betook himself to flight 11 , (2) while the conqueror, (3) perched on c the roof of a barn, loudly proclaimed d his glory. A vulture, who (4) was hovering in the air, heard the voice, saw the cock, pounced 6 upon him, and (5) carried him off f in his claws. (6) Be not elated g and overbearing in prospe- rity. 5. The Sportsman 11 and his Dog. A sportsman, (7) accompanied by his dog, saw a snipe, and, at the same instant 1 , a covey k (8) of (1) Ex. p. 39. n. 4. (2) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (3) Say, on the roof of a barn perched ; the prete- rite participle last. Perched, fluent)* (4) Ex. p. 55. n.7.; p. 75. n. 2. ; p. 224. n. 11. (5) Ex. p. 67. n. 1. ; p. 194. n. 3. (6) Ex. p. 190. n. 3. (7) Say : by his dog accompanied. See note 3. (8) Ex. p. 14. n. 3. a bte >berf)errfd)aft b bte ftlwfyt ergmfen, to betake one's self to flight. ergretfen, comp. insep. and irreg. c aitf d tterfunbtgen* e fyerabfcfytefiien* * bawntragen, to carry off. s ftotj unb iibermut^tg. h bet Sagen [ in bemfelben TCugenblicf * k L 5 226 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. partridges. (1) Perplexed a at b this circumstance, he tried (2) to aim (3) at c both the snipe and the partridges, and hit neither the one, nor the others. My good master d , observed the dog, you should not have (4) aimed at two objects at e once. (5) Had you not been misled by the hope (6) of shooting the partridges, (7) you would not have missed f the snipe. (8) A person seldom succeeds 5 in his pursuits' 1 , if (9) he divides his attention. 6. The Lion, the Tiger, and the Fox. (10) A lion and a tiger, (11) being quite exhausted (1) Ex. p. 225. n. 3.7. (2) Say : tried he. Ex. p. 163. n. 1. (3) Ex. p. 91. n.l. (4) Ex. p. 149. n. 1. and p. 150. ; p. 150. n. 1, 2. ; p. 151. n. 1, 2, 3. (5) Ex. p. 158. n.6.; p. 169. n.l. (6) Ex. p. 129. n. 9. (7) Ex. p. 166. n. 4. 6. (8) A person, man* (9) Say: man. (10) Ex, p. 98. n. 3. (11) Ex. p. 77. n.l.; p. 139. n.l. a ttcrnrirrt gemacfyt, in SBerlegenfyeit gefefet* b burcfy, prep. ace. c auf, ace. d ber $err* e auf einmal, jitQleid)* f uerfefylem * glttcfltcfyen (Srfolg fyaben* h Unternefrnung, TCngelegentyett, f. Sect. II. Fables. 227 by a a conflict, (1) in which they had engaged b for c the prize d of a fawn, found themselves unable 6 to (2) continue the fight, and sank breathless on the ground f . While they were in this situation, (3) a fox came, and carried off s their prey, without (4) either (5) of the combatants being able to oppose him. Brother, said the lion to the tiger, this is the fruit of our quarrel : it has placed us both out of condition 6 to hinder this thief (6) from stealing what was ours. He has outwitted us both. When two fools h quarrel, they generally be- come the victims of their silly contentions ; and (7) a third person reaps the benefit. (1) SBorein* Ex. p. 49. n.3. (2) gortfe^em Ex. p. 196. n. i. (3) Ex. p. 165. n. 4. (4) Say: without that (ofytte bafj) either of the com- batants able was to oppose him. (5) The adjective either, in this situation, has no correspondent term in German. Say here : wcber ber et'ne nod) ber anbere (6) Say: to steal; the infinitive with u, instead of the participle with a preposition. See Gr. p. 459. above. (7) A third person, em fritter* a burcb* b ftd) einlajjen* c urn, ace. d ber ^ang e aufjer @tanbe* f auf ben 33oben * bavontragem r, ber 9larr* L 6 228 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II- 7. The Boy and the Butterfly. A boy, who was (1) walking in a garden, per- ceived a butterfly; and being attracted by the beauty of its colours, (2) began to pursue it. The fugitive, (3) for a long time, eluded the activity of his pursuer ; at last, however 3 , it entered the cup b of a tulip, (4) to repose, and to sip the sweetness of that flower. The boy (5) now eagerly ran forward, and, (6) with a violent grasp, secured the prisoner ; but, at the same c time, crushed d its delicate wings. The conquest (7) thus became useless, and the gratification, which had been expected from the possession, was ruined 6 . (1) Ex. p. 55. n.7.; p. 75. n.2. (2) Ex. p. 130. n. 7. (3) For a longtime, Idltge* Ex. p. 198. n. 4-.; p. 199. n. 1. (4-) Employ itm* Ex. p. 63. n. 3.; p. 113. n. 4. (5) Ex. p. 198. n. 4. ; p. 199. n. 1. To run for- ward, fyinjulaufen ; verb compound separable. (6) Ex. p. 198. n. *. ; p. 200. n. 6. (7) 2lufbtefe2rt. a aber. b tier ,Keld) c jugldrf)/ at the same time. d jerbrttcfetu e jermcfytet. Sect. II. Fables. 229 (1) Pleasure, in the moral a world, is (2) like that butterfly : it is attractive, (3) while we pursue it ; but if it is seized b upon with too much ardour c , it is destroyed, before we can enjoy it. 8. The Heron*. A heron, (4) one day 6 passed by a fish-pond, and saw several carp (5) and pike, which he might have taken. But he (6) happened not to be in a humour to eat, and went on f . After some time (7) he felt his appetite improved, and (8) returned to the place where he had observed the pike and (1) Ex. p. 12. n. 1.; p. 99. n. 1. (2) Ex. p. 107. n. 5. ; p. 176. n. 6. (3) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (4) (gineS SageS* Ex. p. 145. n. l. (5) Say, in German: carps and pikes, .Rarpfen imb (6) The verb to happen, with an infinitive follow- ing, is not within the German idiom. To answer it, in some degree, adverbs must be resorted to, as here, ebem (gr fyatte eben feme fittf! 511 effen* (7) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. (8) Ex. p. 67. n.L; p. 194. n. 3. a ftttlirf)* b ergreifen, to seize upon. c bie 35egterbe d ber Sfteiijer. e ttorbetfommem f wetter geljen. 230 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. carp; but they were now gone a . He (1) only per- ceived (2) a few tench, which he despised. He, (3) therefore, delayed (4) his meal b , and came again, after a little interval. But his mortification was great, when (5) he found, that (6) even the tench had disappeared, and that nothing was within his reach d but (7) a gudgeon. He was too proud to put up e with this wretched little fish, and would not touch it. In the mean while f , his hunger increased, and be- came, at last, so pressing, that it superseded (8) all choice. The unfortunate heron could get nothing (9) but a snail, and was compelled to swallow it. (10) Be not conceited* and capricious 11 : this (1) Only, blo^i, nitr, is one of those adverbs, which are placed before the object. Ex. p. 99. n. 2.; p. 1 14. n. 2.; p. 199. n.2. (2) (Sittige, or eitt Spaar* See Gr. 157. Say : tenches, (3) Ex. p. 204. n. 3.; p. 205. n. 1. (4) Ex. p. 67. n. 1.; p. 194. n. 3. To come again, ttrieberfommetu (5) When, ba (6) @elbft Ex. p. 123. n. 1. (7) Ex. p. 156. n. 2. (8) To supersede, fyitttanfefeen. Ex. p. 195. n. 3. (9) Ex. p. 156. n. 2. (10) Ex. p. 190. n. 3. a fort, weg, gone, b &{ e SRafcljett* c der SSerbritf?. d in feiner eroalt* e ftd) begnitgen, to put up. f un* terbeffem etngebilbet* h eigenftnmg, launifcf)* Sect. II. Fables. 231 is one lesson % which the fable furnishes. But an- other (1) may likewise be derived from b it, namely, that it is wrong to neglect opportunities. 9. The two ('2) Books. In a bookseller's shop, (3) a fine new book, (4) bound in morocco, (5) was standing on the shelf near c an old volume, in a decayed d parchment bind- ing. The new and elegant book was indignant 6 to be in such company, and desired that the old book (6) should be removed. The latter, (7) in vain, re- monstrated*, and appealed 5 to its intrinsic merits. It said, I have passed through 11 several' editions, and have always been esteemed by the learned and wise : but (8) notwithstanding the pride which thou (1) Ex. p. 76. n.2. ; p. 87. n. 2. (2) Ex. p. 219. n. 4. ; p. 224. n. 10. (3) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. The booksellers shop, t>er (4) Say : ajine^ new, in morocco bound book. Ex. p. 80. n. 6. (5) Ex. p. 55. n. 7. ; p. 75. n. 2. (6) Ex. p. 77- n. 2. (7) Ex. p. 198. n.4. (8) Ex. p. 83. n. 2. btc Sefyre* b bawotu c neben, prep. dat. d ab* e ungefyaWen, aufgebracfyt* f egenworfW* lungen macfyen. ffd) berufen, construed with auf h erleben, to pass through. > mefyrere* 232 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. showest, I know not (1) what thy fate will be in the world. Expostulation a , (2) however, was without effect b ; and the new book persisted in its disdain. Not long after this conversation, (3) a man entered the shop, and directed his attention d to those two books. He took 6 down the new (4) one, which contained some trifling f and miserable poetry 5 , and put it back h with contempt : but when ' he looked k at the old volume, he expressed his admiration and regard ; and (5) immediately purchased it, for (6) its contents were rare 1 and valuable. The (7) exterior does not constitute the merit of the man; (8) but the qualities of his mind m and of his heart can alone entitle him to esteem. 10. The Raven and the Falcon. A young raven, who was in the vigour 11 of his (1) Ex. p. 180. n. 5. ; p. 182. n. 4, 5. (2) Ex. p. 206. n. 8. However, abet* (3) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. (4) Ex. p. 46. n. 1. (5) Ex. p. 198. n.4. (6) Ex. p. 112. n. 5.; p. 147. n. 5. (7) >a 2Ceu ere* Ex. p. 29. n. 4. (8) Ex. p. 2. n. 4. ; p. 91. n. 5. ; p. 158. n. 8. a bte egenttorfMltmg* b t>ergebltcfy c bei, in, prep. dat. d flltf* e fyerabnefyttten, irr. comp. sep. 1 unbebeittenb* s ebtcfyte, plur. h nneber fyinfMen 1 we* k befefyen* * wrtreff Kcfy* m ber etj!* a bie t, the vigour of his life. Sect. II. Fables. 233 life, met (1) one day, in his travels % with an old raven, who was infirm, and incapable (2) of flying about b . For this reason , he remained quiet in the hole of a rock. A charitable falcon brought him food, and (3) thus supported 11 his existence 6 . The young raven was surprised at f the sight , and longed h for' this easy and convenient mode of liv- ing. (4) Recollecting (5) what trouble it often cost him to obtain his daily sustenance, he determined to follow the example of the old raven, and trust to the charity of some well disposed k creature for 1 his support. Like" 1 the former 11 , he chose a hole for his abode, and (6) retiring into it, waited with patience. But no supplies p arrived. He fasted a long time, and was, at last, so much tormented with hunger, that he resolved (7) to go in search of food q (1) Ex. p. 229. n. 4. To meet with, antrcffen. (2) Ex. p. 129. n. 9. (3) Ex. p. 228. n. 7. (4) Ex. p. 77. n.l.; p. 139. n. 1. (5) Ex. p. 180. n. 5. ; p. 182. n. 4, 5, 6. (6) Say : when he had retired into it. Ex. p. 77. n. 1.; p. 139. n.l. (7) To go in search of, fud)en. Ex. p. 130. n. 7. a auf fdnen 9eifen* b umfyer* c auS bicfer Urfacfye, t>af>er d erf)altem e t>a2ebem f beu * berTCnbltcf* h tierlangen, fid) fefyneru ' nacfy, prep. dat. k gut well disposed, good natured. ! weQCtt, in TCtt* / for, with the genit. m wie, n t>er erjtere. jiu P btc eben3mtttel, plur. q ba gutter* 234 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. himself. This expedient came too late. He was weakened by his abstinence, and scarcely able to move a . In this state (1) he lingered for a while b , and then died. We (2) ought to trust to Providence, but not to tempt it. 11. The Farmer, the Hunstman, and the Staff. A stag, (3) having been severely chased, (4) ar- rived breathless at a farm-house c , and entreated the farmer (5) to allow d him a place of concealment 6 . The man promised it. Soon after, (6) the hunter approached, and asked the farmer, (7) whether he had seen the stag. No, said he ; he (8) did not come this way. But while f he was (9) saying this, (1) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. (2) Ex. p. 108. n. 1. ; p, 130. n. 3. ; p. 135. n. 4. (3) Ex. p. 77. n. 1.; p, 139. n. 1. (4) Ex. p. 194. n. 3. (5) Ex. p. 130. n. 7. (6) Ex. p. 163. n. 2. (7) Ex. p. 183. n. 7.; p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (8) Ex. p. 55. n. 8. ; p. 70. n. 3. ; p. 93. n. 10. (9) Ex. p. 55. n. 7. ; p. 75. n. 2. a fid) bewegetu b cine 3eit tang* c ber SSauerfyof* d geftattem e bcr cfylupfttrinfel, ber f inbem* Sect. II. Fables. 235 ( 1 ) he treacherously (2) pointed % with his finger, to b the place (3) where the poor animal was hidden. (4) Fortunately, the huntsman did not notice this hint, but rode c off. The stag, (5) immediately, quitted his lurking place, and fled. Whither art (6) thou running? (7) cried the farmer. Dost (8) thou then leave me, as thy enemy, after I have afforded thee protection ? Is this thy gratitude for my kindness ? Yes, replied the stag : (9) had thy finger been as humane as thy tongue, (10) I should be grate- ful; but such double-dealers' 1 , as thou, deserve nothing (11) but detestation and contempt. (1) Ex. p. 165. n.4. (2) Treacherously, wnatym\fytv95$ttft* Ex. p. 145. n. 4.; p. 146. n. 2. (3) Ex. p. 181. n.l, 2. (4) Ex. p. 145. n.4.; p. 163. n.3.5. Fortunately, (5) Ex. p. 198. n.4.: p. 199. n. 1. (6) Ex. p.'55. n. 7. ; p. 75. n. 2. (7) Ex. p. 165. n. 2. (8) Ex. p. 55. n. 8. ; p. 70. n. 3. ; p. 93. n. 10. (9) Ex. p. 123. n. 6.; p. 169. n. 1. (10) Ex. p. 166. n. 6. (11) Ex. p. 156. n. 2. a jeigen, rcetfetu b nacfy, to, prep. dat. c tt>eeiungler 236 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. Duplicity 3 is a vice which is (1) too frequently met with in the world: and assurances (2) of good will b and friendship are not always founded upon sincerity and truth. SECTION III. PIECES FROM HISTORY. 1. Character* of (3) Alfred; from* Hume. The merit of this prince 6 , both (4) in private and public life, may (5) with advantage (6) beset f (1) Say: which one (man), too frequently, in the world meets. To meet with, antreffetU (2) Ex. p. 103. n. 1. (3) Ex. p. 103. n. 1, 2. (4) Ex. p. 91. n. 2. ; p. 91. n. 3. (5) Ex. p. 76. n. 2. ; p. 87. n. 2. (6) With advantage, auf etnc ttortyettyafte SBeife* a bie TCdrfeltrdgereu b bte ewogenljett* bie cfyilberung, d au3 e ber gfirjl* f an bie @cite fefeen/ Sect. III. Pieces from History. 237 in opposition to that (1) of any monarch, or citi- zen, which the annals of any age, or any nation, can present to us. He seems, indeed*, to be the complete model of that perfect character, which, under the denomination of a sage (2), or wise man, the philosophers have been fond (3) of delineating, rather as a fiction of their imagination, than in (4) hopes of (5) ever seeing it reduced 15 to prac- tice ; so happily were all his virtues tempered together, so justly were they blended, and so powerfully did (6) each prevent the other (7) from exceeding its proper bounds. He knew (8) how to conciliate the most enter- prising spirit with the coolest moderation; the most obstinate perseverance with the easiest flexi- bility; the most severe justice with the greatest (1) Ex. p. 76. n. 3. (2) A sage, em aufgelldrter fPtamu (3) Ex. p. 153. n. 2. (4) Say : in the hope. (5) Ex. p. 129. n. 9. (6) Ex. p. 55. n. 8. ; p. 70. n. 3. ; p. 93. n. 10. (7) Ex. p. 227. n.6. (8) Ex. p. 132. n. 1, 2. ; p. 151. n. 5. a in ber f)at, b bringen, c jut SQBtrfHcfyfett, 238 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. lenity; the greatest rigour in (1) command with the greatest affability of deportment ; the highest capacity, and inclination for science, with the most shining talents for action. His civil and military virtues are almost equally the objects of our admiration, excepting only % that the former b , (2) being more rare among princes, (3) as well as more useful, seem chiefly to challenge our applause. (4) Nature, (5) also, as if (6) desirous that so bright a production of her skill should be set in the fairest light, had bestowed (7) on him all bodily accomplishments , vigour of limbs, dignity of shape and air, and a pleasant, engaging, and open countenance. (1) Say; in the command; im (in bem) Ex. p. 86. n. 5. (2) Ex. p. 77. n. 1. ; p. 139. n. 1. (3) Ex. p. 2. n. 3. ; p. 91. n. 1. (4) Ex. p. 12. n. 1.; p. 65. n. 2.; p. 99. n. 1. (5) Ex. p. 165. n. 1. (6) Say : as if she desired. To desire, Wunfcfyett* (7) To bestow, tterletfyen, construed with the dative, without a preposition. a nur auSgenommem b bte erfletn, plur. ber SSorjug, bte 93oU?ommenf)eit + Sect. III. Pieces from History. 239 (1) Fortune alone, by throwing (2) him into that barbarous age, deprived him of historians, (3) worthy (4) to transmit* his fame to b posterity ; and we wish (5) to see him delineated in more lively colours, and with more particular d strokes , that we (6) may, at least, perceive some of those small specks f , from which, as (7) a man, (8) it is impossible he could be exempted. 2. The Resignation* of the Emperor Charles (9) the Fifth; from Robertson. Charles resolved (10) to resign h his kingdoms (1) Ex. p. 12. n. 1.; p. 99. n. 1. (2) Ex. p. 164. n. 4. ; p. 212. n. 12. )at>w:d) ba|j* (3) Ex. p. 105. n. 1. ; p. 175. n. 2. The adjective may be put in apposition, or a relative member formed. See Gr. 397. //. 2. (4) Ex. p. 129. n.9. (5) Ex. p. 130. n. 7. (6) Ex. p. 53. n. 2. (7) Ex. p. 10. n.4. (8) Form this phrase into an adverb, i (9) Gr. 165. (10) Ex. p. 130. n.7. uberliefenu b auf* c fcfytfterm d genaiu e ber h abtretem 240 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. to a his son, with a solemnity (1) suitable 13 to the importance of the transaction ; and to perform this last act d of sovereignty 6 with such formal pomp, (2) as might leave an indelible impression on the minds, not only of his subjects, (3) but of his successor. (4) Having assembled the states of the Low Countries f at Brussels, on the 25th of October, 1555, (5) Charles seated himself, for the last time g , in the chair of state h ; on (6) one side of (7) which was (1) Ex. p. 106. n. 1. ; p. 107. n. 5.; p. 176. n. 5. Say : a to the importance of the transaction suit- able solemnity; and compare Ex. p. 177. n. 2.; p. 231. n.4s (2) As, after such, is expressed by the relative pronoun, or by the conjunction that. Such formal pomp, which might ; or, such formal pomp, that it might leave. (3) Ex. p. 2. n. 4-. (4) Ex. p. 77. n.l.; p. 139. n. 1. ; p. 223. n. 8. (5) Ex. p. 165. n. 4s ; p. 166. n. 1, 2, 3. (6) 2uf, prep. dat. (7) The relative turn, which is here used, cannot well be admitted in German. Say : on one side of it (beffelben), substituting a demonstrative pronoun. a an, with the accusative. b angemcffen* c bcr SSorgang* d bic Jpanblung* e bit ^errfc^aft* ' f bte 9liebertanbe* * jitm (efcten 9Me h ber toat8fe|fel* Sect. III. Pieces from History. 241 placed his son, and on the other his sister, the Queen (1) of Hungary a , (2) regent b of the Ne- therlands ; with a splendid retinue of the grandees c of Spain, and princes of the Empire d , (3) standing between him. The President of the Council of Flanders, (4) by his command, explained, in (5) a few words, his intention (6) in calling this extraordinary meet- ing of the states. He (7) then read the instru- (1) Ex. p. 103. n. 2. (2) Ex. p. 101. n. 6. (3) Say : who stood behind him. Ex. p. 77. n. 1 . ; p. 139. n. 1. ; p. 233. n. 4. 6. The participle, however, might here be used as an adjective in apposition ; htnter thm j!ef)enb (4) Ex. p. 200. n. 5. ; p. 202. n. 1. ; (5) Ex. p. 161. n. 1. (6) The participle cannot here be thus used in German. The infinitive of the verb must be employed substantively. Ex. p. 5. n. 5. ; p. 75. n. 3.; p. 78. n. 8.; p. 145. n. 3.; p. 194. n. 2.; ba SBerufen* Or another substantive must be resorted to, as here, bie SSerit- fung, or ^ufammenrufung. In, to be rendered bet, . prep, dat., bei bent SBeritfen, bet ber SSerttfung. (7) Then, bann, barauf* This conjunction to be placed like an adverb noting time. See Ex. p. 199. n. 1. Compare p. 204. n. 2. a Ungarn. b SRegent, masculine ; SRegentin, femi- nine, c bie rof? en* d bie 242 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. ment a of resignation 11 , by which (1) Charles surren- dered to his son Philip all his territories, jurisdic- tion, and authority in the Low Countries' 1 ; (2) ab- solving his subjects there 6 from their oath of allegiance f to g him, which he required 11 them to transfer to' Philip, his lawful heir, and to serve him with the same loyalty and zeal which they had manifested, during so long a course of years, in support 14 of his government. Charles (3) then rose from his seat, and lean- ing on the shoulder of the Prince of Orange, (4) be- cause he was unable (5) to stand without support 1 , addressed himself to the audience" 1 , and (6) from a paper, which he held in his hand, (7) in order to assist" his memory, he recounted, with dignity, but without ostentation, all the great things which (1) Whereby, Wobttrcfy* Ex. p. 49. n. 3.; p. 181. n. 1. (2) Ex. p. 77. n. 1. ; p. 139. n. 1. (3) Ex.p.l99.n.l.;p.204.n.2. Comparep.241.n.7. (4) Ex. p. 184. n. 1. ; p. 203. n. 3. (5) Ex. p. 186. n. 6, 7. (6) Ex. p. 200. n. 5. (7) Ex. p. 63. n. 3. ; p. 113. n. 4. ; p. 130. n. 5. a bie Urfunbe* b bte 2tt>banfung, c bte ewalt* d bte 9lteberlanbe, e bafelbfh f ber (lib ber Sreue* s gegen, towards. h befefyleru ' an, prep. ace. k jur Unterflufcung* ' bic <5tufce, m bie 3uf)6rer, pi. n nacfyfyelfen* Sect. III. Pieces from History. 243 he had undertaken, and performed, since the com- mencement of his administration*. (1) As soon as he had finished his long ad- dress 11 to c his subjects, and to their new sovereign d , he sunk into the chair, exhausted, and ready 6 to faint f with 5 the fatigue of such an extraordinary ef- fort. During his discourse 11 , (2) the whole audience' melted into tears k some (3) from admiration of his magnanimity 1 ; others softened 111 by the expressions of tenderness" towards his son, and of love to his people p ; and all were affected \ with r the deepest sorrow (4) at losing a sovereign, who had distin- guished the Netherlands, his native country 3 , with particular marks 1 of his regard" and attachment x . (1) Ex. p. 184. n. 1.; p. 203. n. 3. (2) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. (3) Ex. p. 135. n. 1. (4) Say : that they should lose. Ex. p. 139. n. 1. ; p. 233. n. 4. 6. ; p. 241. n. 3. and 6. b bie TCnrebc* e an, prep. ace. d ber &mbe3l)err. e im 33egriff f in SDfynmaityt fallen* * t>om h bie SRebe. * aUe 3uf)orer * jet> fliefen, h-r. insep. ! bie rof? mtttl), ber (Sbelmutlj* m erwetcfyt, n bie 3artlid)f ett flegem P ba SSolf* i geru^rt* r on + s ba SSaterlanb + l ber u bie .gmlb* x bie SSorliebe/ bie M 2 244 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. (1) A few weeks afterwards % (2) Charles, in an assembly no less splendid, resigned 15 to c his son the crown of Spain, with all d the territories (3) de- pending thereon, (4) both in the Old and in the New World. Of all these vast possessions (5) he reserved nothing 6 to himself f , but 8 an annual pen- sion of (6) an hundred thousand crowns, to (7) de- fray 11 the charges 1 of his family k , and to afford him a small sum for acts of beneficence and charity 1 . (1) Ex. p. 161. n. 1. (2) The subject after the verb, in the same man- ner as if an adverb, or a preposition with its case, commenced the sentence. The words, A few weeks afterwards, are a sort of adverbial phrase. Ex. p. 1 46. n. 3. Gr.451. (3) Say: tvhich . thereon depend; or, convert the participle depending into an adjective, dependent, ab* fydngtg, thus : all the thereon dependent territories. On them, battOtU Ex. p. 46. n. 4. (4) Ex. p. 91. n.2. (5) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. (6) Ex. p. 10. n. 1.; p. 39. n.2. (7) Ex. p. 130. n. 2. a %Kfy SSerlauf einiger SBocfyen* b abtreten, an, ace. d grofn e bef>altem f fttrffd). al$* h &efheitu i bie TUiggaben, Soften, pi. k ber au$&alt* Sect. III. Pieces from History. 245 3. Character* of (I) Queen Elizabeth, by^ Hume. (2) There are few great personages, in (3) his- tory, who have been more exposed to the calumnies of enemies, and the adulation of friends, than Queen Elizabeth ; and yet there is scarce any c , whose (4) reputation has been more certainly determined by the unanimous consent of posterity. The unusual length of her administration d , and the strong fea- tures of her character 6 , were able f to overcome all prejudices; and, (5) obliging her detractors to abate much of their invectives, and her admirers some- what of their panegyrics, have at last, in spite of political factions, and, what is more, of religious animosities, produced an uniform judgment with (1) Say: the Queen. Ex. p. 100. n. 1. (2) Ex. p. 122. n. 5. (3) Ex. p. 99. n. 3. ; p. 100. n. 1. (4) Whose, beren* So it must be in this place : for what is generally preferable, refer to Ex. p. 115. n. 1. (5) Say : while (inbem) they obliged. Ex. p. 77. n. 1.; p. 139. n. 1.; p. 233. n. 4. ; p. 241. n. 3. 6.; p. 244. 3. b von* c irgenb cine ^ontgtn* d bie @taat6ttern>altung e t>er Character* f im tanbc fepn, to be able. M 3 246 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. regard (1) to her conduct a . Her vigour, her con- stancy, her magnanimity, her penetration 13 , and vigilance are (2) allowed to merit the highest praise, and appear not to have been surpassed by (3) any person who ever filled a throne. A Conduct c less rigorous, less imperious, more sincere, more indul- gent d to e her people, would have been requisite to form a perfect character. By the force of her mind, (4) she controlled f all her more active and stronger qualities, and prevented them (5) from running into excess ? . Her heroism was exempt from all temerity, (1) With regard, in TCttfefyimg, followed by the genitive case, without any preposition. (2) Are allowed to merit. This construction can- not well be imitated in German. The sense must be expressed in some other manner, for instance : incontrovertibly merit, or, merit, as is universally ac- (3) SSon tr^enb einem terbltcfyem The word $er* fon would not be admissible, in German, in this place. (4-) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. (5) Say: prevented their excess, tterfytttete beren Uebertrdbung* a ba SSenefymem b ber bimfybringenbe SSerffrmb, ber cfyarfftnm c ba$ SBerfafyretu d begunfftgenb* c gegem f im 3aumc fyaltem * in ubergefcetu Sect. III. Pieces from History. 247 her frugality from avarice, her friendship from partiality, her active spirit from turbulence a , and a vain ambition b . She guarded not herself, with equal care, or equal success, from d lesser infirmities, the rivalship of beauty 6 , the desire of admiration, the jealousy of love, and the sallies of anger. Her singular f talents g for h government were founded (1) equally (2) on her temper 'and on her capacity. (3) Endowed with a great command of herself k , she obtained an uncontrolled ascendant 1 over her people ; and while she merited all their esteem by her real virtues, she also engaged 1 " their affection" by her pretended (4) ones. (1) Equally and, ebett (2) On, auf* Ex. p. 240. n. 6. (3) Endowed, beQdbt* This participle may here begin the sentence, as in the English ; or it may be put after the words with which it is connected, as in Ex. p. 225. n. 3. See also Ex. p. 163. n. 1. (4) Say : those, which were only pretended. Ex. p. 46. n. 1. ber Ungeftunn b bte (ghrfucfyt c ftcfyerm d gegetu e ber SBettffrett urn f auSgejetcfynet, g bte abe, 2nlage h it/ for. i tic emiithSjftmmung, emitth3art + k bte elbflbeherr* fcfyung, ' ber (Etnfluf, bte Ueberlegenfyeitf m fid) erwerbetu n bte Siebe, bte 2nbangltd)feit, M 4 248 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. Few sovereigns of England succeeded a to the throne in more difficult circumstances, and none ever conducted the government with such uniform success and felicity. Though (1) unacquainted with the practice b of toleration, the true secret (2) for managing religious factions, she preserved d her people, by her superior providence 6 from those confusions in which theological controversy had involved all the neighbouring nations; and though her enemies were the most powerful princes in Europe, the most active, the most enterprising, the least scrupulous, (3) she was able, by her vi- gour, to make (4) deep f impressions (5) on their (1) This may be expressed, as in English, by the participle, unbeffltmt ; or, you may say: Though she was unacquainted ; and see Ex. p. 87- n. 3. ; p. 94. n.l.; p. 184. n. 4. (2) Say : to manage. Ex. p. 129. n. 9. (3) Subsequent member, with fo Ex. p. 88. n. 3. ; p. 89. n. 1. The conjunctions bod), bennocfy, bemim* Qeacfytet, signifying yet, nevertheless, notwithstanding, are generally made use of, in the subsequent member, when the antecedent begins with though, although. Gr. 382. (4) Say : a deep impression, (5) 2fof. Ex. p. 119. n.2. ; p.240. n.6.; p.247. n.2. a gelangen* b tie 2tu3ubung c beln* d beroafyretu e tie SSorforge* Sect. III. Pieces from History. 249 states ; ( 1 ) her own greatness meanwhile remaining untouched and unimpaired. The wise ministers and brave warriors who flourished during her reign share the praise of her success 1 ; but (2) instead of lessening the ap- plause (3) due b to her, they make great addition to it. (4) They owed all (5) of them their advance- ment to her choice, they were supported by her constancy c ; and with all their ability, (6) they (1) These absolute cases cannot, in German, be admitted. Say : While her own greatness remained untouched and unimpaired. (2) Instead, jfatt, attjhtt, like ofyne/may, in German, be followed by the infinitive with ju* Ex. p. 60. n. 4. ; p. 131. n. 5. ; p. 151. n. 4. Or the conjunction thatma,y be employed after it. Instead that it should lessen which is, in a way, similar to Ex. p. 227. n. 4. (3) Due, gebltfcrent* This is a participle which must be put after the case it governs. Ex. p. 196. n. 6. Say : the to her due applause. (4) To owe, in this sense : it uertanlen fyabem (5) Leave out the genitive, of them, and say merely, alle* Ex. p. 110. n. 3. Refer to Gr. 401. at the top of the page. (6) Ex. p. 164. n. 2. nut tyr taS gob weld)e ifyrem Ittcfe ge- b &uf omment* M 5 250 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. were never able to acquire a any undue ascendant over her. In (1) her court, in her family, in her kingdom, she remained 15 equally mistress . The force d of the tender passions was great over her, but the force of her mind 6 was still su- perior ; and the combat, which her victory visibly cost her, serves only (2) todisplay f the firmness of her resolution, and the loftiness of her ambitious sentiments. (1) The first in is to be rendered by an ; the fol- lowing ones by in (2) Ex. p. 130. n.7. a erlangen, ftd? tterfcfyaffen* b gldcfymajjig, c bie ebieterim d bie tarte* e ber etf! f bartfjum Sect. IV. Epistolary Specimens. 251 SECTION IV. EPISTOLARY SPECIMENS.* 1- (1) Sir, The subject (2) upon which I had the honour to address you a , (3) some time ago, seems to require * There are peculiarities in the epistolary forms of different nations, which result from their respective manners. They consist in the mode of address, and the tenor of phraseology which prevails. The student will do well to read a passage in the Grammar, 217. 3., relative to the mode of address usual among the Germans. (1) The epithets in the commencement of letters must be attended to. Adjectives, such as lieb, tvertfy, tfyeuer, gettebt, or the same in the superlative degree, are generally employed. It is to be recommended, that, before a person begins to write letters in German, he should peruse some samples of epistolary com- position in that language. If the person written to is invested with any particular rank or office, the title of that rank or office, with some accompanying epithet, is made use of; as, 4>od)geef)rtef!et $ err ecretar, Honoured Mr. Secretary. (2) Whereupon, woritber* Ex. p. 49. n. 3. (3) SSor eintger 3eit* Ex. p. 62. n. l. ; p. 147. n. 7. a fid) an jemanfcen wenfcen, M 6 252 Miscellaneous Composition. Part IP a farther explanation. The man (1) in whose behalf I solicited 51 your vote is, in every respect, qualified for the office b . I have since discovered that not only his learning and his manners would entitle him to your favour, (2) but also that his experience in that particular line d of employment 6 would afford a sufficient ground (3) for his election f. I know (4) him, besides, to be a (5) most worthy character 6 ; and he is connected with persons' 1 for whom I entertain the highest regard 1 . All these motives induce k me to say that, by (6) sup- porting his application, you will confer (7) a great obligation 1 upon, Sir, Your obedient, humble Servant, M. (1) In whose behalf, fur ben/ or (2) Ex. p. 2. n.4. (3) 3u. Gr. 362. 1. (4) Say: I know, besides, that he is. Ex. p. 131. n.3. (5) Ex. p. 34. n. 2. ; p. 197- n. 3. . (6) >aburd) baf* Ex. p. 138. n. 2. ; p. 164. n. 4 V (7) To confer upon may here be rendered by erweifen, erjeigen, construed with the dative, without a preposition. a um etroa anfyalten, um etroaS anfuctyen* b ba3 2Cmt* c feitbem/ felt ber 3eit* d tie 2Crt (or, ba gad)/ for the whole phrase, line of employment). e btC efd^afte, pi. f bie (Srnennung, bie 33e|Mimg. * SSftann, 9ftenfcfy, h fieute, plur. 5 bie J bie efalligfett, Sect. IV. Epistolary Specimens. 253 2. (1) Madam, I thank you for the great kindness with which you have received my nephew. He speaks of the manner (2) in which he is treated by you, and your family, in terms a of enthusiasm. Accept 5 (1) The French term Madame prevailed in the German language about the time when Noehden lived, but it is not now so frequently used as formerly, and it is to be hoped that it will in time, with every foreign expression, be entirely abolished. The word gtfllt/ for married women, is substituted, especially when the wife participates, in German, in an official or professional title of the husband: for example, grail )OCtortn, grail ^rofeffortn, which, when accom- panied by some epithet of honour or respect, answers every purpose of courtesy. For unmarried women, a similar mode of address may also be found, without having recourse to the French tongue. See Campe's Dictionary, in the words Madame and Mademoiselle. Compare the remarks on Purism in our Grammar, from p. 446. Young ladies are now generally called grdllleln [name]. This appellation was, up to Noeh- den's time, reserved for young ladies of rank. (2) Say : of your and your family's treatment ; t)0tt Severn unb Sfyw: ^amtlie SSetragen gegen tfym annefymetu 254 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. (1) my sincere acknowledgments* for this mark b of your friendship ; and be persuaded, that nothing would give me so much pleasure, as to find op- portunities (2) of showing my gratitude, by any c service that I might (3) have it in my power to render d to any of your friends. I have the honour to be, Madam, Your much obliged, and most obedient servant. 3. My dear Brother, (4) How long it is since (5) you have written to me ! What can be the cause of this persevering 6 silence ? I am led from conjecture f into apprehen- sion 8 , from uncertainty into fear. (6) Something 11 must have occurred', which has prevented you (7) (1) Ex. p. 190. n.3. ; p. 195. n.2. (2) Ex. p. 129. n. 9. (3) Ex. p. 76. n. 2. ; p. 121. n. 3. To have it in one's power, im tanbe fetnu (4) See Gr. 458. below. (5) Ex. p. 156. n. 4. (6) Ex. p. 43. n.3.; p. 112. n.5. ; p. 113. n. 1, 2.; p. 162. n. 3. (7) Ex. p. 237. n. 7. a bte >anffagung* b bet S5ewet* c ttgenb etru d ewetfetu e fortbauernb* f bte SSetmutfyung* e bte SBeforgntfj* h etroaS* ! ficfy eteignen. Sect. IV. Epistolary Specimens. 255 from sending me only a few ( 1 ) lines. The most likely a cause 1 * is, that you are ill c ; and (2) how that thought alarms me, (3) I cannot tell d you. If I do not receive (4) any intelligence by e the next post, (5) I shall set off*, (6) to see with my own eyes what it is that has thus interrupted your cor- respondence. If this letter reaches 8 you, (7) inform' 1 me (8) whether you have lately seen my mother, and how she does'. She is not (9) fond of writing ; but the last account (10) I had from herself spoke favourably of her health. I am, thank God ! k at present 1 , very well; and (11) should feel myself (1) Ex. p. 230. n.2. (2) Ex. p. 182. n. 4. ; p. 183. n. 2. (3) Ex. p. 168. n. 1. (4) Not any, fetn* (5) Ex. p. 166. n. 4. (6) Ex. p. 130. n.2. 5. (7) Ex. p. 190. n. 3. (8) Ex. p. 182. n. 4-. ; p. 183. n. 7. (9) Ex. p. 153. n. 2. (10) Ex. p. 46. n.6. (11) The first future conditional. * b Me Urfad)e c franf d befcfyret ben* e mtt f ftcfy aufmacfyetu sgelangem h mett>en, anjeigen, construed with the dative. * ftcfy beft'ntem 256 Miscellaneous Composition. Part II. quite happy if my uneasiness* concerning you were removed. Therefore, if it is in your power, (1) write, without delay, (2) to your affectionate b brother. (1) Ex. p. 190. n. 3. (2) To write to a person, an jemanbcn fcfyretbcn ; prep, an* Gr. p. 368. a tie Unrufye, 23efttmmerntf * b bid) Hebenb, APPENDIX. COLLECTION OF PHRASES. How do you do? 1. For petty Conversation, or small Talk. ttten Sftorgen, >err * Good morning, Sir ! N . . . [Name or title of the person addressed.] Uten 2Cbenb Good evening. SSte befmben @te ft* ? n fMore fa-~| 4'" J L speaking. J Quite well. Pretty well. tt)0fyl (or, rei^t Very well. Have you slept (or rested) well? It is fine weather. Very warm and pleasant. Very fresh air. Extremely cold. A cutting wind. Is the wind high ? It will probably rain. It rains it snows. It thunders it lightens. fd)Iafen (or, (58 if! fc^oneS SKetter* warm unb angc- frifdje 8uft 2Ceufi crjl fait* (gin fcfynetbenber 2Btnb e^t ber SBtnb ftarf ? @8 wirb wafyrfcfyeinl rcgnen* (56 regnet e fc^nctt* (g bonncrt c8 Wifet* * The address SSJJettt )err is a Gallicism or a Hollandism, and does not occur in genuine German conversation ; but it abounds in the usual " Guides to Conversation," and it is sometimes heard from the lips of Germans who ape foreign manners. 260 Phrases. SMe @onne fcbeint, SGBoUen @te fpa&eren geben ? SBollen @tc nid)t cinen fur^en pafctergang madden ? SBoEen @ie mitgeben? $aben ie bier angenel;* me @paiergdnge ? 3a, recfyt fyub|cbe* 9Jetten (Sterne? Stein, faf! gar md)t* @te (efen fefyr toiel* feljr wentg* te^en @ie frttf) auf ? 9tel Ubr if! e3 ? or, i J if! tie Ioc!e ? (Sin Ubr (or @in6) 951 ertel auf brei SSiertel auf bret* It hails. The sun shines. Will you take a walk? Will you not take a short walk? Will you go with me (or, with us) ? Have you pleasant walks here? Yes, very pretty walks. Do you never ride (z. e. ride on horseback) ? No, hardly at all. You read a great deal. I beg your pardon, very little. Do you rise early ? No : but I generally go to bed late. What o'clock is it ? One o'clock. Two, o'clock. A quarter past two (lit. a quarter upon three). Half past two (lit. half three). Three quarters after two, or a quarter to three (lit. three quarters upon three). Phrases. 261 iff bret U&r* geftt aitf tier, fcfylagt wer* t e3 gefcfylagen ? nnrb gleid) fcblagen, Uhr ju gefchttrinbe langfam* It is three o'clock. It is past three (lit. it goes' towards four). It is striking four. Has it struck ? It will strike immediately. Does your watch go right ? Rather too fast too slow. mup metne Uhr aitf* I must wind up my watch. fefcen ? (Sr war nicfyt jtt ^aben @ie tte ^ gelefen? SSelang. @ic S5riefe cr* fatten? bte ^)oj! i|! nod) ntcfyt angef ommen* Swollen (Sic &u ISlittas beimtr effen, or, fpeifen? SBotten @ie jit Tfbenb (or, biefen TCbenb) bet mtr effen? SSie @te belieben, or, nrie @te wollen* Have you seen Mr. N. ? He was not at home. Have you seen the news- papers ? What is the news ? Not much nothing of importance. Have you received let- ters? No ! the post is not come in yet. Will you dine with me ? Will you sup with me ? As you like, or, as you please. 262 Phrases. (gffen @te gern Sfcinb* fleifd)? Sfl fcierwrn gefdttig, or, belieben (Sic ftiewon ? @ie effen ntd)t @ie laffen fid) n SBoIIen @te ein SOSein trinfen ? Stolen SBein* SSei^en SBein* Sfl Sbnen ^affee, ober St)ee gefallig ? 3$ ban! e Sftnen, SSleiben ie nod) cin Do you like beef? Do you choose any thing of this ? You do not eat. You want to be pressed. Will you take a glass of wine? Red wine. White wine. Do you choose coffee, or tea? I thank you. (This, like the French bien obli- ge, generally signifies, that the offer is de- clined.) Stay a little longer. iie nid)t Do not be in a hurry. 3d) habe nid)t (or, f eine) I have not time. SOBotlen @ie vweber fom Will you come again? men? (53 tfyut mir Seib id) I am sorry I am pre- ftabe 2Cbftaltung vented. Sf)un 3d) ^abe lange ba Iftcf ntd)t ge^abt, @tc jtt fefyen; unt> freuc mid) ba^er, @te fo wo|)l ^u fmben* @ie befmben 2)id) bod) aud) red)t wot)t 9Ba ma^en S^f e roertfyen ^^ bin S^nen fur S&fc gutige 9Zad)fragc er* bunben . @ie ft'nb aUc gefitnb itnb wo^l* )a freitt mid) attferor- benttid)* Sffiotlen (Sic ftd) nid^t nicbcrlaffen ? id) Sfynen einen @fttt)l anbieten ? I am happy to have the honour of seeing you. Pardon me for taking the liberty of paying my respects to you. You do me great honour by your kind visit I have, for a long while, not had the happiness of seeing you ; and am therefore glad to find you so well. You are likewise very well, I hope. How is your family ? I am obliged to you for your kind enquiry : they are all in health, and well. That gives me very great pleasure Will you not take a seat ? May I offer you a chair ? Phrases. 265 3d) btfte gefyovfamf!, be* miifyen a wtrb tte(e (Sfyre fur mii^ fet)n* ^ empfefyle mic^ 3t>ncn I beg, you will not trouble yourself. I beg you to be seated. You are very kind. I thank you very much. I am afraid of being trou- blesome to you. No, not in the least: on the contrary, it gives me great pleasure to see you. I could wish, if your time permits, to speak with you a few words upon a certain subject. I will, with the greatest pleasure, serve you in it. You oblige me greatly by your kindness. May I request the honour of your company to- morrow to dinner, or to-morrow evening to supper. Literally : That will be a great honour for me. Literally : . I recommend myself to you. 266 Phrases. tie u empfehlen* cfy bitte mir ferner Sfyre eroogenbeit unt> greimtfcfyaft au id) bte (ghre baben ? Sarf id) <3te bitten ? Literally: I have the honour of recommend- ing myself to you. (These are expressions of respect, similar to your humble servant, your most obedient ser- vant.) I further request your favour and friendship. May I have the honour? May I beg you ? May I trouble you ? Will you permit me ? I beg pardon. Excuse me, pardon me. Pardon me. Does it please you ? 3. For Travelling. SOBie rcett iff ^Berlin won How far is Berlin from bier ? here ? 3tt>Clttfd)e) Sttet* Twenty (German) miles. lem* * A German geographical mile is the fifteenth part of an equatorial degree ; consequently, the proportion of a German geographical mile to an English statute mile is = 15 : 69^, or nearly 1 : 4-f ; which makes a German mile equal to 4-6333 English. Four English geographical miles make one German geographical SBolIen ic mir erlauben ? Sd) bitte urn SSerjei^ung* @ntfd)ittbigen @ie mid)* SSerjetfjen @ie mir* Phrases. 267 2Bte ttiele tationen fia* How many stages have ben nrir ju paffiren?* we to pass ? 3d) glaube, jefjm I think, ten. Unb wie met bejafylt man And how much does one fur bie (Station? pay for a stage ? Sfaifen ie mit jroei, ober Do you travel with two, mit met $)ferben ? or with four, horses ? ewofynlid) mit sroeien, Commonly with two, when voenn bie SSecje ntc^t the roads are not too u fd)lect)t ftnb^ bad. X)ie trafe won .>. nad) The road from H. to G. * i|! iemltd) gut, @6 is pretty good. It is a ijt etne v^eerjlra^e (or, turnpike road. chaussee). -j- 3|l ba$ bie ganbjlrafe, Is that the high road, or ober ein ^elbroeg (91e* a cross-road (by-road) ? benweg) ? mile. The common German mile is longer than the geographical. But, at present, distances are usually reckoned in German according to geographical miles. * This phrase contains two impure, or spurious words, not truly German ; viz. @tattonen and pafftren* A well-taught and accurate scholar will always shun such foreign terms. Here the phrase might be : SBie oft werben bie spferbe gewecfyfelt ? How many times will the horses be changed ? However, in common life, the expressions tatfonen and paffircn may be considered as a sort of technical language ; and it may, therefore, in a practical point of view, be ex- cusable to employ them. f A French term for a high road. N 2 268 Phrases. 2So gefyt btefer SBeg Mn ? liefer $ur recfyten (or, jur linfen (or, >te SBege fmb )te (gpuren ttef* auf $>oj?fneci)t (or, SpofHttton, also, @d)wager) fafyrt ju SBarum fa^rt Sfcr fo langfam ? 2Btt fa^ren faum etnc tjalbe (Deutfdbe) 9Ketre in etner tunbe* 2)a if! u arg. SBenu Sfyr ntd)t beffer <3tnb bte ^)ferbc mfibe ? 2Btr muff en SSorf^ann ne^men* in biefem )orfe Where does this road go to? This to the right. That to the left. The roads are rough. The ruts deep. It goes up hill down hill. Postboy, go on. Why do you drive so slowly ? Drive faster. We scarcely go half a (German) mile in an hour. That is too bad. If you do not drive better, you will not get any money for yourself, [lit. drink money.] Are the horses tired? We must get some ad- ditional horses. Stop in this village. * The gratuity that is given to the lower people, as an additional reM p ard for their services, besides their wages, is called Snnfgelb, literally, drinking money ; that is, money intended to be spent in drink. Phrases. 269 bafetbj! etn tan id) fiber Sftacfyt fyier Heiben (or, logiren*)? aben @ie gute SSetten? Sfynen aufjwuartem at, id) witt auSfletgen* SRetymt meine (Sacfyen au6 bem SBagem 33ringt ben Coffer fyerein. SSerge^t ben gKantelfac! nic^t* ^>err SBittf), net;men @ic metn epdtf in 2Ccfyt. @te mujfen bafur einj^e* l)en* SBo tfl ba6 @d)lafimmer? @ie cin* ftajfen @ie SSringen @te ein Sid)t* SSa6 fann id) 511 effen fjaben ? Is there an inn ? Can I stay here this night ? Have you good beds ? At your service. Well, I will get out. Take my things out of the carriage. Bring in the trunk. Do not forget the port- manteau. Landlord, take care of my luggage. You must answer for it Where is the bed-room ? Light a fire, or, make a fire, in the room. Get a fire lighted. Bring a candle. What can I have to eat ? * Here is, again, a French term, of which descrip- tion there are still many to be found in the language : though they begin to be exploded from accurate and refined discourse and composition, they remain as yet current among the people, and are, in some instances, better understood than the legitimate German expres- sions. Wherever they occur in these phrases, they will be printed in Italics, and be put in parentheses. N 3 270 Phrases. )aS iff alfo hier nicfyt gebrducfylid), etnen ^u* cfyen&ettel u fyalten* 9lun waS faun id) fommen? 3Sa fur 2Bem fyaben l)ter? (gr i(l nicfyt ttorjugltd)* )a$ tfyut mir geib, SBte wel fojlet bie S^ (or, bouteille) ? ja, wcnn S^n iff* aSelt'eben @te mir 9flein! fatten 9fcaf)m (or, fatten glott, falte atrne), ott id? @ie bebienen ? SBringt mir ben tiefet* fnecfyt unb ein ^)aar $) will ba6 SSett ge* roarmt l>aben* c^ benfe morgen fefyr fru^ abjureifen* What sort of wine have you here ? It is not particularly good. That I am sorry for. How much does a bottle cost? That is money enough for it. [lit. therewith it is paid. 3 I do not like it. $affee Can you make some coffee for me ? gefdlltg Certainly, if you please. Do you like boiled milk with it ? No, cream. Shall I help you ? Bring me the boot-jack, and a pair of slippers. I will have my bed warmed. I think of setting out very early to-morrow. Phrases. 271 @ie muffen mid) alfo Therefore you must call werfem me. Um n)ie tttel Ufyt ? At what o'clock ? Um rceldje 3eit ? At what time ? Um fyalb ttier* At half past three. )enn icfy mu0 morgen in For I must reach Ham- ^amburg anfommen* burg to-morrow. )a3 werben @ie f(^n?er^ That you will hardly be lid) fonnen* able to do. SBir roollen fetjen* We will see. 2Bo ijl bie Sftecfynung? Where is the bill? 9?ed)nen fie i)ter nai^ Do you reckon here by Sfyaletn *, rofc^en, dollars*, groshes, and unb ^)fenntgen ? pence ? @inb bie utC'-grofc^en, Are those good-groshes, ober fogenannte 5Dla* or what they call Mary- rien*grofd)cn?t groshes?f 2Sa ifl ein ^teu^er ? What is a kreutzer ? * A dollar (SftetcfyStfyaler, commonly miscalled rix- dollar by the English, which, in the original, means dollar of the Empire), according to the general coinage in Germany, was, upon an average, usually estimated at 3s. 6d. English : but, whenever the course of ex- change is in favour of England, it is little more than 3s. During the late war, the balance of exchange was often against England, and the rixdollar was worth more than 3s. 6d. At present, the Prussian dollar is in more general circulation in Germany than the 3ftetrf)3* tfyaler, and is worth nearly 3s. f They were called Mary-groshes, because they bore originally an impression of the Holy Virgin. N 4 272 Phrases. er e (Secfyfer ein ro* fcfyen (or, tttcr-gro-- fcben), SSter iinb jwanjig ure* grofcfyen ein Staler* 2C$t rofcfyen (i. e. ute* grofdjen) ein >nttel, ober ein fyalber ulbem (Sed)jel)n ein ulben*' >ber, nad) 50?arien-gro= fd;en, rote triel gel)en auf einen Staler? @ec^6 ttnb breipig* (Sin ^Pfennig ijl ber ad)te Xfyil eine 9)?arien-- grofdbenS, unb ber 2Sa I;cipt ein fattier? (Sin fyalber fDJarien*gro in feller i ein pfennig. biefen, gibt e fo t>ie!e 9Kunjarten in Scutfd^lanb, ba^ e Sett erforbert, ft'e fen* nen u ternen* gunf Staler macfyen eine Two kreutzers a sexer. Two sexers a grosh (or good-grosh), equal to three English halfpence. Four and twenty goocl- groshes a dollar. Eight groshes (i. e. good- groshes) a drittel, or half a gilder, equal to an English shilling. Sixteen a gilder. Or, according to Mary- groshes, how many go to a dollar ? Thirty- six. A penny is the eighth part of a Mary-grosh, and the twelfth of a good-grosh, or half a farthing English. What is called a matteer? Half a Mary-grosh. A heller is less than a penny. Besides these, there are so many sorts of coin in Germany, that it re- quires time to become acquainted with them. Five dollars make a pis- tole. Phrases. 273 >a fceifjt, nid)t fo cjenannte rofe Staler, otergran&ojtfc&e mr* (53 ijl etn ^riebrtd) b'or, em 8oui b'or, etn GJarlb'or.f Sfl bie Pffole (or, bet grietrtd) b'or, &c.) ott wtcfytig ? SSieUcidjt cfwaS ju leid^t eben @ie 2Cufgelb (or That is to say, rixdollars, not what are called big dollars, or French dol- lars. Get change for me. It is a Frederic d'or, a Louis d'or, a Charles d'or. Is the pistole (or the Fre- deric d'or, &c.) full weight ? Perhaps somewhat too light. Do you give agio ? nung id) IDie fommt bie 3led)* What does the bill amount to? I tyejafylen? What have I to pay? betrdgt ; fo The bill amounts to so much. Landlord, you understand making out a bill. * These dollars are also called, in Germany, , foliage dollars, from the wreath of foliage im- pressed upon them. f All these are different denominations for a pistole, taken from the names of the sovereigns that coined them. J Agio (Xufgelt) is money paid for the difference between the value of gold and silver coin. In Ger- many, the balance is generally in favour of the gold. 274 Phrases. 2)a if! unbittig* >a$ if! bittig* @3 if! ju wet aber fyier if! Sfor elb* 2Bo fmb We 9>fetbe ? pannt an* Sftacfyt fort* Sjl ber 2Bagen gefcfymiert ? (Sinb bie 9ldber in gutem tanbc? SBelcfyer if! bet befic That is unreasonable. That is reasonable. It is too much but here is your money. Where are the horses ? Put to. Make haste. Literally: Has the carriage been greased? i.e. Have the wheels been greased? Are the wheels in good condition ? Nothing broken ? Which is the best inn at H.? VOCABULARY. 1. Terms relating to the Human Body. ;Der &eib, the body. )er .Stopf/ the head. >te cfyldfe, plur. the temples. SMe (Sttrne (or, (gtirn), the forehead. >a3 2uge, the eye. 2)a6 ^ugenlieb, the eye- lid ; pi. bte 2Cugenlieber* >te iugenbraune, the eyebrow : pi. bte 2Ctt* , genbrauneiu 2>ic 2ugenttnmpern, pi. the eyelashes. Ste ^aare, pi. the hair; sing. baS ^>aar 2)te S^afe/ the nose. >a S^afenlod), the nos- tril. >a SD^r, the ear. >er SKunb, the mouth. SDte Sippe/ the lip. n, the tooth. anleic the gums. , the tongue. )er aumen, the pa- late. >er SSacfen, tie S5arfe, bte SOBanae, the cheek. Da ^tnn, the chin. Stc'^tnnlabe, ber $tmt* badfen, the jaw-bone. 25er SSart, the beard. te ^ei)le, the throat, the windpipe. SDet -f^alS, the neck, chiefly the forepart. 25cr 9lacfen, the neck be- hind. 3Me coulter, bte 2CcfyfeI, the shoulder. )er Slttdfen, the back. er Olucfgrat, the back- bone, the spine. 2)er 2Crm/ the arm. , the elbow. , the hand. 2Me gauft, the fist. 35et Singer, the finger. 25er iftagel, the nail. ^er 2)attmen, the thumb. 276 Vocabulary. Der .ftttocfyel, the knuckle. Die SSrufl, the breast, chest. Der asaudb, the belly. Der geib, the body, the abdomen, or (more de- cently) the stomach. Der Sftagett, the stomach. Da3 SSein, the leg. Der cfyenfel, the thigh. Da .ftttie, the knee. Die c^ene, ba3 acfe, ter ^acfen, the heel. Da6 elenf, the joint. Die ^aut, the skin. Da gleifd), the flesh. Da3 SBlut, the blood. Da efcirn, the brain. Die (Singeweifce, pi. the bowels. Da erj, the heart. Die gunge, the lungs. 2. Terms relating to Dress. . Die ^letbung, dress, clothes. Die .ftletbungSjiude, pi. wearing apparel. Die SBdfcfye/ clothes which are sent to the wash, linen. Da Slid)/ the cloth : also the handkerchief. Die Seinmnb, linen cloth. Die (Seibe, silk. Die SBBoUe, wool. Die S3aumn>olle, cotton, tb, a man's dress- coat; also a woman's gown. Der 9fcoltt, the hat. Die $t&$e> the cap. Da6 )al0titd), the neck ' cloth. Da @d)nupftud), the pocket-handkerchief. Da6 ^emb, the shirt ; or shift. Die SBefte, the waistcoat. Die $ofen ( also bit Vocabulary. Ill e, in the sing.), the breeches, smallclothes. Die SBeinf letter, the trow- sers. (Sin $)aar ^ofett, a pair of breeches, a pairof small- clothes. @tn ^Paar 33einileiber, a pair of trowsers. Der trumpf, the stock- ing ; pi. bie (Strumpfe* @in $aar trtimpfe, a pair of stockings. Da (Strumpfbanb, the garter. Der cfyuf), the shoe ; pi. bie cfyufye* Der@tiefet, the boot; pi. bie tiefel* Der ?)anf Offel, the slipper ; pi. bie 9)antoffetm Die @d)natte, the buckle, f, the button. e, the pocket. Die (Sdjnurbruf^/ the stays. Der gaben, the thread. Die Sftabel, the needle, the pin. Die tecfnabel, the pin. 3. Terms relating to the House, Furniture, Utensils, fyc. Die SEfyitr, the door. Da3 Stettjfar, the window. DaS Dad), the roof. Die Dede, the ceiling; also, the cover of any thing. Die SEreppe, the stairs. DaS eldnber, the rails, balusters. Der 5fen, the stove. Der ^amin, bie ^euer- ffdtte, the fireplace. , the house. Da Simmer, the apart- ment, the room, cham- ber. Der @d, tne hearth. Die -ftttcfye, the kitchen. Die ^ofole, the coal. DaS 4)ofy, the wood. Da3 SSrennfyofj/ the fire- wood. Der tein, the stone. Da3 SBett, the bed. Da ^iffert, the cushion. Da3 .ft opffiffen, the pillow. Die 23etten, pi. ba e* bett, the bedding. Da geberbett, the fea- ther-bed. Die SOBolIene Detfe, the blanket. ^5er Stfd), the table. Ser tll^l, the chair. 25er effel, a large chair, also, a stool. Die Sufftetf *> the carpet. )er SSor^ang, bie ar* tine/ the curtain. )a S^effer, the knife. SMe abel, the fork. 2)er Soffel^ the spoon. l, the table- spoon. )er t)eel6ffel, the tea- spoon. er SSorlegeloffel, grope Coffel, the ladle, soup- ladle. )er belter, the plate. >te djttJTel, the dish. 3>a3 JBedPen, the bason. , the glass. SBeinglaS, the wine- 25a SSterglaS, the beer- glass. )a6 QtOe la, the large glass, the goblet. >ev Sopf, the pot. Die Sflffe/ cup and saucer. Da6 .ftopfcfyen, the cup; ,ba djdlcljen, or, Un> terfdjdldjen, the saucer- Die Dbertaffe, the cup; tie Untertaffe, the saucer. Die glafie (bte bou- teille), the bottle. DaS S^eejeu.q, the tea things. Da ifd)tU$, the table- cloth. Dug Sellertucb, (tie ser- viette), the napkin. DaS |)anbtud), the towel. Da3 Settud), the sheet. DieSO?atra^e,the mattress. Die focfe, the bell. Da6 C^Iof/ the lock. Der (5d)!itjTer, the key. Da (Sd)luffellod}, the keyhole. Vocabulary. 279 Die ^euerjange, the tongs. Der (Scourer, bag cbttr* eifen, the poker. Die cfyaufel, the shovel. Dag id)t, the candle; also, the light. Die Sampe, the lamp. Dag Sftacfytlicfyt, the night- light. Der eild)ter, the candle- stick. Die gicfytfcfyeere, bie Stcfyt* pttlje, the snuffers. Dag Rapier, the paper. Die geber, the pen. Die Dtnte, the ink. Dag Dtntenfaf, the ink- stand. Der SSle^jlift, the (black lead) pencil. 4. Terms relating Die peife, the food. Der ranf, the drink. Da6 etrdnf/ the beve- rage. Dag SSrot, the bread. Die S3 utter/ the butter. Dag SSutterbrot, bread and butter. Dag gleifd), the meat. Dag JKtnbfletfd), beef. Dag ^ammdjietfd), or, mut- to Food and Drink. ton. Dag JtalbfTeifd), veal. Dag djwetnfleifd}, pork. Der (Scfyinfen, ham. Der @pecf, bacon. Der ^)uter, turkey. , the capon. , the fowl. U^n, chicken. Die ang, the goose. Die (Snte, the duck. Dag eflugel, birds for the table, poultry. Die aube, the pigeon. Dag JRebfiuhn, the par- tridge. Die (Scfynepfe, the snipe. Die SKalbfcfynepfe, the woodcock. Der ^hafan, the pheasant. Dag SBilbpret, game, ve- nison. Der |>afe, the hare. Der gtfd), the fish. Der ^arpfe, the carp. Die cljleifee, the tench. Der Sacfyg, the salmon. 280 Vocabulary. te goreUe, the trout. er 3Cal, the eel. )er SSarS, the perch. >er glimbet, the flounder. >er @torf ftfd), cod. >er Cfyellftfcfy, the had- dock. >er JDrebS, the crawfish. er Rummer, the lobster. >ie tebbe, the crab. >ie 2Cufhr, the oyster; pi. bte 2uj!ern >a @al&, the salt. er spfejfer, the pepper. )a )el, oil. >er (Sjjtg/ the vinegar. >a3 emufe, the vege- tables. 2)er parget, asparagus. Sie ^artoffel, the pota- to ; pi. ^artoffcln* Ser ^o{)l/ the cabbage. >er SBIumenfo^l, cauli- flower. 2)er pinat, spinage. .1C rbfe, the pea; pi. (grbfett. e, the bean ; pi. ;Dte / the turnip. e, the carrot. ^tC Utfe, the cucumber. )te S^tebel/ the onion. er Sletttg, the radish. >er S^eerretttg, the horse- radish. er @alat, the salad. SiC Uppe/ the soup. Sie SBrfi^e, bte gleifcfc brfi^C, the broth. Sie Sitnfe, S5rul)e (or, sauce), gravy. te ^aftete, the pasty, pie. >er 97ad)tifd), the dessert. as> ebacP ene, the pastry. Ser Jtlof, the dumpling. 2)er Cubbing, the pud- ding. ie Sorte, the tart. Ser ^UC^Cn, the cake. )a IDbj!, the fruit. )er TC^fel, the apple. Ste $3tme, the pear. Ste ^trfd^e, the cherry. te ^flaumc, the plum. tc Swetf^e, the long plum (a particular sort of plum of an oblong shape, and blue colour, much cultivated in Ger- many, but hardly known in England).* * It is sometimes to be met with in Covent Garden Market, under the name of prune-plum. Vocabulary. 281 Me 9>firfd)e, the peach. >i eglatte9>ftrfcfye, Nectar* pft'rfcfye, the nectarine. )tC TCprtCOfe, the apricot. )te 3^rone, the lemon. >te Welftne (tie orange), the orange, sweet orange, China orange. X)ic ^Pomeranje, sour orange, Seville orange. )te (Erbbeere, the straw- berry ; pi. (grbbeeren* )ie $imbeeve, the rasp- berry. )te fSftaulbeere, the mul- berry. )ie (Stacfcelbeere, the gooseberry. the currant. >te 5Beintraubc, bic SSraube, the grape. >te ^ajlantC/ the chesnut. , the nut ; pi. t>f e 3)tC SSMnujJ , the walnut. Da6 SBaffer, the water. S)a6 S5ter, the beer. X)er SBein, the wine. >et JRljeinwein, Rhenish wine. 2)er granjn?ein, French , the punch. Ser SSranntwetn, the brandy. >er S^ee r the tea. )er ^affec, the coffee. Set Surfer, the sugar. 5a3 tllf)fh'tcf, the break- fast. abl, the dinner. a8 Tfbenbeffen, the sup- per. X)a6 gRa^l, bie ^abljeit, the meal. (gffen/ to eat. n, to breakfast. cJTen, or, fyei* fen/ to dine. 3u TTbenb cffen, to sup. SSrtnfen, to drink. Da tucf, the piece. >etr JBiffcn, the bit. (gin wenig, cin biSc^en, a little. 282 5. Terffts relating to the People in the House. Der SSebiente, the man- servant. Die Slttagb, ba3 SSftdbcfyen, the woman-servant, the maid. DerTCufwdrter, the waiter, t, the ostler, r, the coach- man. Der 9)oftfned)t (postil- lion), the post-boy. Der^ettf nedfyt, the groom. Der ^ned^f, a farmer's man, a servant that does hard work. the master. Die ftrau, the mistress. Der SBtrth, the landlord. Die 9fttrtf)in, the land- lady. Der SSerwalter, the stew- ard. Die ^Muefljdltenn, the housekeeper. Der |>auttogt, the bailiff. DerJtettner, ^elletmetfter, @d)enf, the butler. Der ,ftammerbiener, the valet. Die Jtammerfrau, bie ^ammerjungfer, ba3 , ,ftflmmermdbd)en, the waiting-woman, the lady's maid. >er ^od), the man-cook. Die JtSdjitm, the woman- cook. Der Dtener, the servant. man- servant that does the coarse and heavy work in a house, for instance, in an inn, the boots. er ret SSiertet 3afcr, three quarters of a year, or nine months. in fjalbeS 34r, half a year, or six months. (Stn SSiertel 3b r / a quar- ter of a year, or three months. Me SSiertel Sa&r, every quarter of a year, or every three months. Vocabulary. 283 2(lle fyalbe Sa^re, every six months. 2CUe tret SStertet Safcre, every nine months. @in Satyr um anbere, every other year. Der SJftonat, the month. Der 3anuar, Banner/ SBtntermonat, January. Der gebruar, ^ornung, February. Der Siftdrj, gen&monat, March. Der Tfyril, S5Iumenmo nat; ra^monat, D|icr monat, April. X)er SOJat), SSonnemonat, SRofenmonat, May. Der Suntu, t, June. monaf, July. X)er 2Cuguf!/ (Srntemonat, August. Der (September, ^erbjl- monat/ September. Der October, SfBeinmo* nat, October. 2>er Sfloioember, nat, 3Jetfmonat, No- vember. Der December, 6{)rijlmo* nat, December. Der ag, the day. 2?er SJtontag, Monday. >er 2)tenta9, Tuesday. )er Sftittwocfyen, tie SKittWOC^e, Wednesday. Der SonnerStag, Thurs- day. )er greitag, Friday. >er onnabent", @am flag/ Saturday. >er arj, black. SBei^, white, lit, good. @d)lecl)t, bad. @d)0n, fine, beautiful. $dfU$, ugly. Imbfd), pretty, arjitg, nasty. 9ltebltd), neat, nice. efrf)tt>tnt>, quick. gangfam/ slow. OJeifen, to travel. to go, to walk, to move by means of a carriage. SRetten, to ride on horse- back. gaufcn, to run. teljen, to stand. , to lie down. , to fetch. SSrtngen, to bring. @ptelen, to play. Cefen, to read. @d)reiben, to write. cfynetben, to cut. Sadjen/ to laugh. Sddjeln, to smile. SSeinen, to cry, to weep. @pred)en, to speak, n, to talk. CORRIGENDUM. The following words in pages 184. to 186. should stand in Italics : When, that, before, as soon, although, In order that, as, in the same manner, after. LONDON : Printed by A. SPOTTUWOODE, New- Street- Square. UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY A 000020519 5